Page 1 ® R&S Signal and Spectrum Analyzer User Manual (;×ì;2) 1173.9411.02 ─ 19...
Page 2 FSW8 (1312.8000K08) ● R&S ® FSW13 (1312.8000K13) ● ® R&S FSW26 (1312.8000K26) ● ® R&S FSW43 (1312.8000K43) ● R&S ® FSW50 (1312.8000K50) ● ® R&S FSW67 (1312.8000K67) In addition to the base unit, the following options are described: ● R&S ®...
Page 3: Table Of Contents
® Contents R&S Contents 1 Preface....................15 About this Manual....................... 15 Documentation Overview................... 16 Conventions Used in the Documentation..............17 1.3.1 Typographical Conventions...................17 1.3.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions...............18 2 Welcome to the R&S FSW..............19 3 Getting Started..................20 Preparing for Use......................20 3.1.1 Putting into Operation....................
Page 4 ® Contents R&S 3.4.2 Accessing the Functionality...................83 3.4.3 Changing the Focus...................... 83 3.4.4 Entering Data........................ 83 3.4.5 Displaying Results......................85 3.4.6 Getting Help........................92 3.4.7 Remote Control......................94 4 Applications and Operating Modes............96 R&S MultiView......................97 Available Applications....................98 Selecting the Operating Mode................. 103 Starting an Application.....................
Page 5 ® Contents R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements................184 5.4.1 About the Measurement....................184 5.4.2 Carrier-to-Noise Results....................185 5.4.3 Carrier-to-Noise Configuration..................186 5.4.4 How to Determine the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio............. 187 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW)............188 5.5.1 About the Measurement....................188 5.5.2 OBW Results.......................190 5.5.3 OBW Configuration..................... 191 5.5.4 How to Determine the Occupied Bandwidth...............
Page 6 ® Contents R&S 5.8.6 How to Perform an APD or CCDF Measurement............261 5.8.7 Examples........................262 5.8.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement............ 265 Time Domain Power Measurement................265 5.9.1 About the Measurement....................265 5.9.2 Time Domain Power Results..................265 5.9.3 Time Domain Power Basics - Range Definition Using Limit Lines......266 5.9.4 Time Domain Power Configuration................
Page 7 ® Contents R&S 5.13.4 EMI Measurement Configuration................299 5.13.5 EMI Result Analysis....................306 5.13.6 How to Perform EMI Measurements................306 5.13.7 Measurement Example: Measuring Radio Frequency Interference......308 5.13.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting EMI Measurements..........310 6 Common Measurement Settings............312 Configuration Overview....................312 Data Input and Output....................
Page 8 ® Contents R&S 6.6.4 How to Output a Trigger Signal...................436 Adjusting Settings Automatically................437 7 Common Analysis and Display Functions........440 Result Display Configuration................... 440 7.1.1 Basic Evaluation Methods...................440 7.1.2 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid............442 Zoomed Displays...................... 447 7.2.1 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom................
Page 9 ® Contents R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation......553 8.4.1 Import/Export Functions....................554 8.4.2 How to Export Trace Data and Numerical Results............555 8.4.3 How to Export a Peak List...................556 8.4.4 Reference: ASCII File Export Format................557 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings....560 8.5.1 Print and Screenshot Settings..................560 8.5.2...
Page 10 ® Contents R&S 10.1.1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols..............609 10.1.2 SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)........614 10.1.3 VISA Libraries......................614 10.1.4 Messages........................615 10.1.5 SCPI Command Structure...................616 10.1.6 Command Sequence and Synchronization..............624 10.1.7 Status Reporting System.................... 627 10.1.8 General Programming Recommendations..............644 10.2 GPIB Languages.......................
Page 11 ® Contents R&S 11.5.2 Configuring Power Measurements................695 11.5.3 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR..............700 11.5.4 Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio................. 726 11.5.5 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth................727 11.5.6 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask..............729 11.5.7 Measuring Spurious Emissions...................765 11.5.8 Analyzing Statistics (APD, CCDF)................778 11.5.9 Measuring the Time Domain Power................787 11.5.10...
Page 12 ® Contents R&S 11.9.3 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings..............1000 11.9.4 Storing or Printing Screenshots................1005 11.9.5 Storing Measurement Results...................1011 11.9.6 Examples: Managing Data..................1015 11.10 Configuring the R&S FSW..................1018 11.10.1 Configuring the Reference Frequency..............1018 11.10.2 Calibration and Temperature Checks............... 1022 11.10.3 Working with Transducers..................1025 11.10.4...
Page 13 ® Contents R&S 13.4 Minimizing the Measurement Duration..............1104 13.5 Improving Averaging Results................1104 13.6 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Hints..............1105 13.7 Obtaining Technical Support................. 1105 List of remote commands (base unit)..........1107 Index....................1124 User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 19...
Page 14 ® Contents R&S User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 19...
Page 15: Preface
® Preface R&S About this Manual 1 Preface 1.1 About this Manual This User Manual describes general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes in the R&S FSW. Furthermore, it provides all the information specific to RF measurements in the Spectrum application. All other operating modes and applications are described in the specific application manuals.
Page 16: Documentation Overview
® Preface R&S Documentation Overview Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual ● Index 1.2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R&S FSW consists of the following parts: ● Printed Getting Started manual ● Online Help system on the instrument ●...
Page 17: Conventions Used In The Documentation
® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R&S FSW in general, and the Spectrum application in particular. Furthermore, the soft- ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri- bed here.
Page 18: Conventions For Procedure Descriptions
® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font. "References" References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota- tion marks. 1.3.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument, several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task.
Page 19: Welcome To The R&S Fsw
® Welcome to the R&S FSW R&S 2 Welcome to the R&S FSW The R&S FSW is a new high-performance Rohde & Schwarz signal and spectrum ana- lyzer developed to meet demanding customer requirements. Offering low phase noise, wide analysis bandwidth and straightforward and intuitive operation, the analyzer makes measurements fast and easy.
Page 20: Getting Started
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 3 Getting Started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S FSW Getting Started manual. ● Preparing for Use....................20 ● Instrument Tour.......................39 ● Trying Out the Instrument..................58 ●...
Page 21 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Risk of electrostatic discharge (ESD) Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to the electronic components of the instrument and the device under test (DUT). ESD is most likely to occur when you con- nect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument's test ports.
Page 22 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 3.1.1.1 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument Check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory lists for the various items. Check the instrument for any damage. If there is damage, imme- diately contact the carrier who delivered the instrument.
Page 23 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Bench Top Operation If the R&S FSW is operated on a bench top, the surface should be flat. The instrument can be used in horizontal position, standing on its feet, or with the support feet on the bottom extended.
Page 24 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Risk of injury and instrument damage if stacking instruments A stack of instruments may tilt over and cause injury. Furthermore, the instruments at the bottom of the stack may be damaged due to the load imposed by the instruments on top.
Page 25 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use For details on the connector refer to chapter 3.2.2.2, "AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch", on page 53. ► Connect the R&S FSW to the AC power supply using the supplied power cable. Since the instrument is assembled in line with the specifications for safety class EN61010, it may only be connected to an outlet that has a ground contact.
Page 26 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 3.1.1.6 Performing a Self-Alignment and a Selftest During instrument start, the installed hardware is checked against the current firmware version to ensure the hardware is supported. If not, an error message is displayed ("WRONG_FW") and you are asked to update the firmware.
Page 27: Windows Operating System
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 3.1.1.7 Checking the Supplied Options The instrument may be equipped with both hardware and firmware options. In order to check whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated on the delivery note, proceed as follows. 1.
Page 28 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use used with a Rohde & Schwarz instrument, it is also recommended that anti-virus soft- ware be installed on the instrument. While Rohde & Schwarz does NOT recommend running anti-virus software in the background ("on- access" mode) on Windows-based instruments, due to potentially degrading instrument performance, it does recommend running it during non-critical hours.
Page 29 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use The Automatic Login Function Deactivating the automatic login function When shipped, the instrument is already configured to automatically log on under Win- dows 7. To deactivate the automatic login function, perform the following steps: Select the "Windows"...
Page 30: Connecting Usb Devices
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use All necessary system settings can be defined in the "Start > Control Panel" menu (for required settings refer to the Windows 7 documentation and to the hardware descrip- tion). 3.1.2.5 Accessing the Windows Task Bar The Windows task bar also provides quick access to commonly used programs, for example Paint or Wordpad, but also IECWIN, the auxiliary remote control tool provided free of charge and installed by Rohde &...
Page 31: Connecting An External Monitor
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Connecting a memory stick or CD-ROM drive If installation of a memory stick or CD-ROM drive is successful, Windows informs you that the device is ready to use. The device is made available as a new drive and is dis- played in Windows Explorer.
Page 32 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Screen resolution and format The touchscreen of the R&S FSW is calibrated for a 16:10 format. If you connect a monitor or projector using a different format (e.g. 4:3), the calibration will not be correct and the screen will not react to your touch actions properly.
Page 33: Setting Up A Network (Lan) Connection
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 3.1.5 Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection The R&S FSW is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ether- net LAN (local area network). Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned by the network administrator and the Windows firewall configuration is adapted accord- ingly, the interface can be used, for example: ●...
Page 34 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Risk of network failure Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network, consult your network administrator. Errors may affect the entire network. ► To establish a non-dedicated network connection, connect a commercial RJ-45 cable to one of the LAN ports.
Page 35 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use If DHCP is "Off", you must enter the IP address manually, as described in the fol- lowing steps. Note: When DHCP is changed from "On" to "Off", the previously set IP address and subnet mask are retrieved. If DHCP is "On", the IP address of the DHCP server is obtained automatically.
Page 36 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 7. Select the "Properties" button. 8. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses" and enter your own DNS addresses. For more information refer to the Windows operating system Help. 3.1.5.3 Using computer names In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instru-...
Page 37: Configuring The Initial Instrument Settings
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Schwarz White Paper "Malware Protection" (available at http://www2.rohde- schwarz.com/file_13784/1EF73_0E.pdf) and the Windows Help system. Note that changing firewall settings requires administrator rights. 3.1.6 Configuring the Initial Instrument Settings This section describes how to setup the R&S FSW initially. For further basic instrument settings see the R&S FSW User Manual.
Page 38 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use ● Self-alignment data ● General instrument settings such as the IP address ● Measurement settings ● User data created during operation (see also table 8-2) ● Any data created by other applications installed on the R&S FSW, for example text editors (Notepad), the Clipboard, drawing tools etc.
Page 39: Instrument Tour
® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Secure Passwords By default, the initial password for both the administrator account ("Instrument") and the "SecureUser" account is "894129". When the secure user mode is activated the first time after installation, you are prompted to change the passwords for all user accounts in order to improve system security.
Page 40 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Fig. 3-1: Front panel view 1 = Touchscreen 2 = POWER key 3 = SYSTEM keys 4 = Headphones connector and volume control 5 = USB connectors 6 = POWER SENSOR connector 7 = PROBE connector 8 = NOISE SOURCE CONTROL 9 = Function keys 10 = Keypad...
Page 41 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Risk of touchscreen damage during operation The touchscreen may be damaged by inappropriate tools or excessive force. Observe the following instructions when operating or cleaning the touchscreen: ● Never touch the screen with ball point pens or other pointed objects with sharp edges.
Page 42 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour tapped on the screen to trigger the same behavior, and vice versa. Using the touch- screen, the following tasks (among others) can be performed by the tap of your finger (see also chapter 3.3, "Trying Out the Instrument", on page 58): ●...
Page 43 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Icon Description Zoom mode: displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom area Multiple zoom mode: multiple zoom areas can be defined for the same diagram Zoom off: displays the diagram in its original size SmartGrid: activates "SmartGrid"...
Page 44 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour You can hide the softkey display, e.g. when using remote control, in order to enlarge the display area for the measurement results ("Setup > Display > Displayed Items"). See the User Manual for details. Context-sensitive Menus Markers and traces in the display, as well as the information in the channel bar, have context-sensitive menus.
Page 45 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour ● Keyboard displayed at the top of the screen ● Keyboard displayed at the bottom of the screen ● No keyboard displayed You can use the TAB key on the on-screen keyboard to move the focus from one field to another in dialog boxes.
Page 46 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour using the VOLUME control to the right of the female connector. If a plug is connected, the internal loudspeaker is automatically switched off. To use the PHONES connector, in the "Output" dialog box (INPUT/OUTPUT key), select "Video Output"...
Page 47 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 3.2.1.9 Function Keys Function keys provide access to the most common measurement settings and func- tions. A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the User Manual. Table 3-3: Function keys Function key Assigned functions Basic measurement settings FREQ...
Page 48 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Function key Assigned functions Measurement and evaluation functions MEAS Provides the measurement functions. Measurement of multicarrier adjacent channel power (Ch Power ACLR) Carrier to noise spacing (C/N C/No) Occupied bandwidth (OBW) Spectrum emission mask measurement (Spectrum Emission Mask) Spurious emissions (Spurious Emissions) Measurement of time domain power (Time Domain Power) Signal statistics: amplitude probability distribution (APD) and cumulative...
Page 49 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Type of key Description ESC key Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active. Quits the edit mode, if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Can- cel"...
Page 50 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour ● In a table: moves the selection bar vertically ● In windows or dialog boxes with a vertical scroll bar: moves the scroll bar Arrow Left/Arrow Right Keys The <arrow left> or <arrow right> keys do the following: ●...
Page 51 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour The upper BNC connectors BASEBAND INPUT I and BASEBAND INPUT Q are used to input single-ended signals, the positive signal input for differential signals, as well as input from active Rohde & Schwarz probes (R&S RT-ZSxx and differential probes RT- ZDxx).
Page 52: Rear Panel View
® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour The rear panel provides a third TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT connector, see chap- ter 3.2.2.10, "TRIGGER 3 INPUT/ OUTPUT", on page 56. 3.2.1.15 EXT MIXER Connector (optional) External mixers can be connected at the EXT MIXER LO OUT/IF IN and IF IN female connectors to increase the available frequency range.
Page 53 13 = GPIB interface 14 = Analog baseband interface (option B71) 15 = External generator control (option B10) 16 = IF OUT (2GHz) connector, for models R&S FSW43/50/67 only 17 = OCXO external reference (option B4) 18 = REF INPUT/OUTPUT connectors 3.2.2.1...
Page 54 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Position O: The entire instrument is disconnected from the AC power supply. For details refer to chapter 3.1.1.4, "Connecting the AC Power", on page 24. 3.2.2.3 DISPLAY PORT and DVI You can connect an external monitor or other display device to the R&S FSW to pro- vide an enlarged display.
Page 55 382. 3.2.2.8 IF OUTPUT (2 GHz) The female SMA connector is only available for instrument models R&S FSW43/50/67 and can be used to provide intermediate frequency (IF) output of approximately 2 GHz at a frequency of 2 GHz.
Page 56 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Since the Digital I/Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path, both cannot be used simultaneously. When one is activated, established connec- tions for the other are disconnected. When the second input is deactivated, connec- tions to the first are re-established.
Page 57 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 3.2.2.13 GPIB Interface The GPIB interface is in compliance with IEEE488 and SCPI. A computer for remote control can be connected via this interface. To set up the connection, a shielded cable is recommended. For more details refer to "Setting Up Remote Control" in the User Manual.
Page 58: Trying Out The Instrument
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Connector Reference signal Usage REF INPUT 1...20 MHz To provide an external reference signal on the R&S FSW. 0...10 dBm REF OUTPUT 1...20 MHz To provide the same external reference signal received by the REF INPUT 1...20 MHZ connector to another 0...10 dBm device, when available.
Page 59: Measuring A Basic Signal
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument ● Zooming into the Display..................68 ● Saving Settings....................... 71 ● Printing and Saving Results..................73 3.3.1 Measuring a Basic Signal We will start out by measuring a simple sinus wave, using the internal calibration signal as the input.
Page 60 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Instrument warmup time Note that the instrument requires an initial warmup time after switching it on. A mes- sage in the status bar ("Instrument warming up...") indicates that the operating temper- ature has not yet been reached. Wait till this message is no longer displayed before you start a measurement.
Page 61: Displaying A Spectrogram
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 3.3.2 Displaying a Spectrogram In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" spectrum display, the R&S FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data. A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency, the y- axis shows the time.
Page 62: Activating Additional Measurement Channels
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Fig. 3-7: Spectrogram of the calibration signal 3.3.3 Activating Additional Measurement Channels The R&S FSW features multiple measurement channels, i.e. you can define several measurement configurations in parallel and then switch between the channels auto- matically to perform the measurements sequentially.
Page 63 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Fig. 3-8: Adding a new measurement channel 3. Change the frequency range for this spectrum display: In the "Frequency" dialog box, set the center frequency to 500 MHz and the span to 1 GHz. Fig.
Page 64 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Fig. 3-10: Time domain display of the calibration signal 5. Create a new channel for I/Q analysis: a) Press the MODE key. b) Tap the "IQ Analyzer" button to activate a channel for the I/Q Analyzer applica- tion.
Page 65: Performing Sequential Measurements
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument To display the MultiView tab An overview of all active channels is provided in the "MultiView" tab. This tab is always displayed and cannot be closed. ► Tap the "MultiView" tab. Fig. 3-12: The "MultiView" tab 3.3.4 Performing Sequential Measurements Although only one measurement can be performed at any one time, the measurements configured in the active channels can be performed sequentially, that means: one after...
Page 66: Setting And Moving A Marker
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Fig. 3-13: "MultiView" tab with active Sequencer figure 3-13, the "Spectrum 2" measurement is currently active (indicated by the "channel active" icon in the tab label). 3. Stop the Sequencer by tapping the "Sequencer" softkey again. 3.3.5 Setting and Moving a Marker Markers are useful to determine the position of particular effects in the trace.
Page 67: Displaying A Marker Peak List
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 6. Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position. The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line. Notice how the position and value change in the marker area of the diagram. 3.3.6 Displaying a Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum automatically.
Page 68: Zooming Into The Display
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Tap the "SmartGrid" icon in the toolbar to activate SmartGrid mode. 4. Drag the "Marker Peak List" icon from the evaluation bar to the lower half of the display to add a new window for the peak list. 5.
Page 69 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument The icon is highlighted orange to indicate that multiple zoom mode is active. 2. Tap the diagram near the first peak and drag your finger to the opposite corner of the zoom area. A white rectangle is displayed from the point where you tapped to the current position.
Page 70 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument d) Press the RUN SINGLE key on the front panel to perform a new sweep with the increased number of sweep points. Fig. 3-17: Zoomed peak with increased number of sweep points Note that the trace becomes much more precise.
Page 71: Saving Settings
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 6. To increase the size of the third zoom window, drag the "splitter" between the win- dows to the left or right or up or down. Fig. 3-19: Enlarged zoom window 3.3.8 Saving Settings In order to restore the results of our measurements at a later time, we will store the instrument settings to a file.
Page 72 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Keep the default "File Type" setting "Instrument with all Channels" to store the con- figuration of all channels. Fig. 3-20: Saving the instrument settings to a file 4. Tap the "Save" button. The file MyMultiViewSetup.dfl is stored in the default directory C:/R_S/ instr/user.
Page 73: Printing And Saving Results
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 3.3.9 Printing and Saving Results Finally, after a successful measurement, we will document our results. First we will export the numeric trace data, then we will create a screenshot of the graphical dis- play.
Page 74: Understanding The Display Information
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 3.4.1 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram in Spectrum mode. All different information areas are labeled. They are explained in more detail in the following sec- tions. = Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2+3 = Window title bar with diagram-specific (trace) information = Diagram area with marker information = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on measurement application...
Page 75 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 3.4.1.1 Channel Bar Using the R&S FSW you can handle several different measurement tasks (channels) at the same time (although they can only be performed asynchronously). For each channel, a separate tab is displayed on the screen. In order to switch from one channel display to another, simply select the corresponding tab.
Page 76 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument An orange "IQ" (in MSRA mode only) indicates that the results displayed in the MSRA application(s) no longer match the data captured by the MSRA Master. The "IQ" disap- pears after the results in the application(s) are refreshed. icon indicates the currently active channel during an automatic measurement sequence (Sequencer functionality).
Page 77 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument information is displayed in gray font and only when applicable for the current measure- ment, as opposed to the channel-specific settings that are always displayed. The following types of information may be displayed, if applicable. Table 3-6: Common settings displayed in the channel bar The sweep is set to single sweep mode.
Page 78 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument <NOR | APR> An external generator is being controlled by the R&S FSW (requires option R&S FSW- B10). Ext. Gen NOR: the measurements are normalized with the results of the external generator cali- bration APR (approximation): the measurements are normalized with the results of the external generator calibration;...
Page 79 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument MAX HOLD MIN HOLD AVERAGE (Lin/Log/Pwr) View VIEW Norm/NCor Correction data is not used. 3.4.1.3 Marker Information Marker information is provided either in the diagram grid or in a separate marker table, depending on the configuration. Marker information in diagram grid Within the diagram grid, the x-axis and y-axis positions of the last 2 markers or delta markers that were set are displayed, if available, as well as their index.
Page 80 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument MDepth AM modulation depth Third order intercept measurement 3.4.1.4 Frequency and Span Information in Diagram Footer The information in the diagram footer (beneath the diagram) depends on the current application. For Spectrum mode, it contains the following information: Label Information Center frequency...
Page 81 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument In the MultiView tab, the progress bar indicates the status of the currently selected measurement, not the measurement currently being performed by a Sequencer, for example. Date and time The date and time settings of the instrument are displayed in the status bar. Error messages If errors or irregularities are detected, a keyword and an error message, if available, are displayed in the status bar.
Page 82 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The following keywords are used: DATA ERR For Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17) only: Error in digital I/Q input data For details on the Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17) see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
Page 83: Accessing The Functionality
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 3.4.2 Accessing the Functionality All tasks necessary to operate the instrument can be performed using this user inter- face. Apart from instrument specific keys, all other keys that correspond to an external keyboard (e.g. arrow keys, ENTER key) operate conform to Microsoft. For most tasks, there are at least 2 alternative methods to perform them: ●...
Page 84 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Particularities in Windows dialog boxes In some cases, e.g. if you want to install a printer, original Windows dialog boxes are used. In these dialog boxes, the rotary knob and function keys do not work. Use the touchscreen instead.
Page 85: Displaying Results
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Entering a blank ► Press the "Space" bar, or press the "0" key and wait 2 seconds. Correcting an entry: 1. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to the right of the entry you want to delete. 2.
Page 86 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument each application, a new measurement channel is created and displayed in a separate tab on the screen. The results of a measurement channel can be evaluated in many different ways, both graphically and numerically. For each evaluation method the results are displayed in a separate window in the tab.
Page 87 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Remote command: on page 683/ INSTrument: C REate[: N EW] INSTrument: C REate: D UPLicate on page 683 To change the application in an active channel 1. Select the tab of the channel you want to change. 2.
Page 88 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument ● New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to the screen. The position of each new window depends on where you drop the eval- uation icon in relation to the existing windows. ●...
Page 89 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column. A single row is available as the drop area for the window in the SmartGrid. The row can be split into columns, or a new row can be inserted above or below the existing row (if the maximum of 4 has not yet been reached).
Page 90 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument How to Add a New Result Window Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window. Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per measurement channel (i.e. per tab). 1. Activate SmartGrid mode. All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis- played as icons in the evaluation bar.
Page 91 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The windows are rearranged to the selected layout, and "Delete" and "Move" icons are displayed in each window. 5. To close a window, select the corresponding "Delete" icon. Remote command: on page 824 / LAYout:...
Page 92: Getting Help
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument useful to maximize an individual window to the entire screen temporarily in order to analyze the results in more detail. To switch between a split and a maximized display without having to close and re-open windows, press the SPLIT/MAXIMIZE key on the front panel.
Page 93 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument If no context-specific help topic is available, a more general topic or the "Contents" tab is displayed. For standard Windows dialog boxes (e.g. File Properties, Print dialog etc.), no context- sensitive help is available. ►...
Page 94: Remote Control
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The entries containing these characters are displayed. 4. Double-tap the suitable index entry. The "View" tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed. To search topics for a text string 1. Switch to the "Search" tab. 2.
Page 95 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 3.4.7.1 Using the LXI Browser Interface in a LAN LAN eXtensions for Instrumentation (LXI) is an instrumentation platform for measuring instruments and test systems that is based on standard Ethernet technology. LXI is intended to be the LAN-based successor to GPIB, combining the advantages of Ether- net with the simplicity and familiarity of GPIB.
Page 96: Applications And Operating Modes
® Applications and Operating Modes R&S 4 Applications and Operating Modes The R&S FSW provides several applications for different analysis tasks and different types of signals, e.g. W-CDMA, I/Q analysis or basic spectrum analysis. When you activate an application, a new measurement channel is created which determines the measurement settings for that application.
Page 97: R&S Multiview
® Applications and Operating Modes R&S R&S MultiView In this operating mode, data acquisition is performed once as a realtime measurement, and the captured data is then evaluated by any number of applications. Thus, a real- time measurement triggered with a frequency mask can be performed, and the results can be evaluated in the VSA application, for example, to detect the cause of a fre- quency exception.
Page 98: Available Applications
® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications 4.2 Available Applications The R&S FSW provides some applications in the base unit while others are available only if the corresponding firmware options are installed. Not all R&S FSW applications are supported in MSRA or MSRT mode. For an overview of supported MSRA applica- tions see the R&S FSW MSRA User Manual.
Page 99 ® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications LTE..........................101 Noise Figure........................101 Phase Noise........................101 Pulse Measurements....................101 Realtime Spectrum......................101 TD-SCDMA BTS......................102 TD-SCDMA UE......................102 Transient Analysis.......................102 Vector Signal Analysis (VSA)..................102 WLAN..........................102 Spectrum In the Spectrum application the provided functions correspond to those of a conven- tional spectrum analyzer.
Page 100 ® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications 3G FDD UE The 3G FDD UE application requires an instrument equipped with the 3GPP User Equipment Measurements option, R&S FSW-K73. This application provides test meas- urements for W-CDMA uplink signals (mobile signals) according to the test specifica- tion.
Page 101 ® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications For details see the R&S FSW-K10 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL GSM, see on page 686 INSTrument[: S ELect] I/Q Analyzer The I/Q Analyzer application provides measurement and display functions for I/Q data. For details see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
Page 102 ® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications For details see the R&S FSW-K160R User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL RTIM, see on page 686 INSTrument[: S ELect] TD-SCDMA BTS The TD-SCDMA BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the TD-SCDMA Base Station Measurements option, R&S FSW-K76.
Page 103: Selecting The Operating Mode
® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Selecting the Operating Mode 4.3 Selecting the Operating Mode The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, however, the pre- setting can be changed. (See chapter 9.3.4.5, "General Configuration Settings", on page 581). Both the operating mode and the application can be selected in the "Mode"...
Page 104: Starting An Application
® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Starting an Application 4.4 Starting an Application The default application in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode is a Spectrum measure- ment. The application can be selected in the "Mode" dialog box which is displayed when you press the MODE key.
Page 105: Running A Sequence Of Measurements
® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements New Channel The applications selected on this tab are started in a new channel, i.e. a new tab in the display. Remote command: on page 683 INSTrument: C REate[: N EW] on page 686 INSTrument[:...
Page 106 ® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements ment, the sweep count is considered. Thus, each measurement may consist of several sweeps. The currently active measurement is indicated by a symbol in the tab label. The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as the measure- ments are performed.
Page 107: Sequencer Settings
® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements Tab name application Sweep mode Sweep count Spectrum 3 Spectrum Cont. Sweep IQ Analyzer IQ Analyzer Single Sweep For single Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed: 5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer For continuous Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed: 5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer, 5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer,...
Page 108: How To Set Up The Sequencer
® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements Sequencer State Activates or deactivates the Sequencer. If activated, sequential operation according to the selected Sequencer mode is started immediately. Remote command: on page 689 SYSTem: S EQuencer on page 688 INITiate:...
Page 109 ® Applications and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements 4. To change the Sequencer mode and start a new sequence immediately, select the corresponding mode softkey, or press the RUN SINGLE or RUN CONT key. The measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs until the Sequencer is stopped.
Page 110: Measurements
® Measurements R&S Available Measurement Functions 5 Measurements In the Spectrum application, the R&S FSW provides a variety of different measurement functions. ● Basic measurements - measure the spectrum of your signal or watch your signal in time domain ● Power measurements - calculate the powers involved in modulated carrier signals ●...
Page 111: Frequency Sweep
® Measurements R&S Available Measurement Functions played when you press the MEAS key or select "Select Measurement" in the configura- tion "Overview". When you select a measurement function, the measurement is started with its default settings immediately and the corresponding measurement configuration menu is dis- played.
Page 112: Zero Span
® Measurements R&S Available Measurement Functions Zero Span A sweep in the time domain at the specified (center) frequency, i.e. the frequency span is set to zero. The display shows the time on the x-axis and the signal level on the y- axis, as on an oscilloscope.
Page 113: Obw
® Measurements R&S Available Measurement Functions Measures the occupied bandwidth, i.e. the bandwidth which must contain a defined percentage of the power, and opens a submenu to configure the measurement. For details see chapter 5.5, "Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW)", on page 188. OBW measurement is only possible in the frequency domain (span >...
Page 114: Ccdf
® Measurements R&S Available Measurement Functions For details see chapter 5.8, "Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF)", on page 251. Remote command: on page 778 CALCulate<n>: S TATistics: A PD[: S TATe] Results: on page 785 CALCulate: S TATistics: R ESult<t>? CCDF Measures the complementary cumulative distribution function (CCDF) and opens a submenu to configure the measurement.
Page 115: Basic Measurements
® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements For details see chapter 5.10, "Harmonic Distortion Measurement", on page 269. Remote command: on page 796 CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: F UNCtion: H ARMonics[: S TATe] First harmonic: on page 830. CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: F UNCtion: C ENTer THD: CALCulate<n>:...
Page 116: Measurement Examples - Measuring A Sinusoidal Signal
® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements 2. Configure the number of sweeps to be performed in a single measurement ("Sweep Config" dialog box, see "Sweep/Average Count" on page 412). 3. If necessary, configure how the signal is processed internally ("Bandwidth" dialog box, see "Sweep Type"...
Page 117 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements High input values If levels higher than +30 dBm (=1 W) are expected or are possible, a power attenuator must be inserted before the RF input of the analyzer. Otherwise, signal levels exceed- ing 30 dBm can damage the RF attenuator or the input mixer. The total power of all occurring signals must be taken into account.
Page 118 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements Increasing the Frequency Resolution The frequency resolution of the marker is determined by the resolution of the trace. A trace consists of 1001 trace points, i.e. if the frequency span is 1 MHz, each trace point represents a span of approximately 1 kHz.
Page 119: Measurement Example - Measuring Levels At Low S/N Ratios
® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements 5.2.2.2 Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Signal Counter The built-in signal counter allows you to measure the frequency more accurately than measuring it with the marker. The frequency sweep is stopped at the marker, and the R&S FSW measures the frequency of the signal at the marker position (see also chap- ter 7.4.1.5, "Performing a Highly Accurate Frequency Measurement (Signal...
Page 120 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements The displayed noise level of a signal analyzer depends on its noise figure, the selected RF attenuation, the selected reference level, the selected resolution and video band- width and the detector. For details see: ● chapter 6.4.1.2, "RF Attenuation", on page 394...
Page 121 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements 5. To suppress noise spikes, average the trace. In the "Traces" configuration dialog, set the "Trace mode" to "Average" (see "Trace Mode" on page 465). The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged. To perform averaging, the R&S FSW automatically switches on the sample detector.
Page 122 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements Fig. 5-3: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio with a smaller video bandwidth 7. By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10, the noise is reduced by 10 dB. Set the RBW to 100 kHz. The displayed noise is reduced by approximately 10 dB.
Page 123: Measurement Examples - Measuring Signal Spectra With Multiple Signals
® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements 5.2.4 Measurement Examples - Measuring Signal Spectra with Multiple Signals ● Separating Signals by Selecting the Resolution Bandwidth......... 123 ● Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier in the Frequency Domain........................126 ● Measuring AM-Modulated Signals................
Page 124 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements 2. Set the center frequency to 128.015 MHz. 3. Set the frequency span to 300 kHz. 4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 30 kHz and the video bandwidth to 1 kHz. Note: Larger video bandwidths. The video bandwidth is set to 1 kHz in order to make the level drop in the center of the two signals clearly visible.
Page 125 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements Fig. 5-7: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution bandwidth which is larger than their frequency spacing 6. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz. The two generator signals are shown with high resolution. However, the sweep time becomes longer.
Page 126 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements Fig. 5-8: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution bandwidth (1 kHz) which is significantly smaller than their frequency spacing 5.2.4.2 Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier in the Frequency Domain In the frequency range display, the AM side bands can be resolved with a narrow bandwidth and measured separately.
Page 127 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements 1. Select PRESET to reset the instrument. 2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz. 3. Set the frequency span to 50 kHz. 4. Select MEAS > "AM Modulation Depth" to activate the modulation depth measure- ment.
Page 128 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements Table 5-5: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU) Frequency 128 MHz Level -30 dBm Modulation 50 % AM, 1 kHz AF 1. Select PRESET to reset the instrument. 2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz. 3.
Page 129: Measurement Examples In Zero Span
® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements Fig. 5-12: Measurement of the AF signal of a carrier that is AM-modulated with 1 kHz 7. Activate the internal AM demodulator to output the audio signal. a) Press the MKR FUNC key. b) Select "Marker Demodulation". The R&S FSW automatically switches on the AM audio demodulator.
Page 130 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements 5.2.5.1 Measuring the Power Characteristic of Burst Signals To measure power in zero span, the R&S FSW offers easy-to-use functions that mea- sure the power over a predefined time. Measuring the Power of a GSM Burst During the Activation Phase Signal R&S FSW Generator...
Page 131 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S1" to the start of the burst. g) Select the "Right Limit" input field. h) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S2" to the end of the burst.
Page 132 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements Table 5-7: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU) Frequency 890 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation GSM, one timeslot activated The measurement is based on the example "Measuring the Power of a GSM Burst During the Activation Phase" on page 130.
Page 133 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements 4. Move the falling edge of the burst to the center of the display. To do so, switch the trigger "Slope" to "Falling" (TRIG > "Trigger/Gate Config"). The R&S FSW displays the falling edge of the GSM burst. Fig.
Page 134 ® Measurements R&S Basic Measurements Table 5-8: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU) Frequency 890 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation GSM, one time slot is switched on 1. Select PRESET to reset the instrument. 2. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz. 3.
Page 135: Channel Power And Adjacent-Channel Power (Aclr) Measurement
® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Fig. 5-19: Measurement of the signal-to-noise ratio of a GSM burst signal in zero span 5.3 Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Measuring the power in channels adjacent to the carrier or transmission channel is useful to detect interference.
Page 136: About Channel Power Measurements
® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 5.3.1 About Channel Power Measurements Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most important tasks for a signal analyzer with the necessary test routines in the field of digital trans- mission.
Page 137 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Results are provided for the TX channel and the number of defined adjacent channels above and below the TX channel. If more than one TX channel is defined, the carrier channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values should be referenced must be defined.
Page 138: Channel Power Basics
® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Label Description Channel Channel name as specified in the "Channel Settings" (see "Channel Names" on page 158). Bandwidth Configured channel bandwidth (see "Channel Bandwidths" on page 156) Offset Offset of the channel to the TX channel (Configured channel spacing, see "Channel Bandwidths"...
Page 139 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement ● Fast ACLR (Zero-span method ), i.e. using a channel filter IBW method When measuring the channel power, the R&S FSW integrates the linear power which corresponds to the levels of the measurement points within the selected channel. The signal analyzer uses a resolution bandwidth which is far smaller than the channel bandwidth.
Page 140 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement measurement time per channel is set with the sweep time. It is equal to the selected measurement time divided by the selected number of channels. In the "Fast ACLR" mode, the R&S FSW measures the power of each channel in the time domain, with the defined channel bandwidth, at the center frequency of the chan- nel in question.
Page 141 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement For the same repeatability, the sweep time would have to be set to 8.5 s with the inte- gration method. The figure 5-22 shows the standard deviation of the results as a func- tion of the sweep time.
Page 142 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement All instrument settings for the selected channel setup (channel bandwidth, channel spacing) can be optimized automatically using the "Adjust Settings" function (see "Opti- mized Settings (Adjust Settings)" on page 154). The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration "Overview", chapter 6.1, "Configuration Overview",...
Page 143 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Frequency Span The frequency span must cover at least the channels to be measured plus a measure- ment margin of approximately 10 %. If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth (or the adjacent- channel bandwidths) being analyzed, only a few points on the trace are available per channel.
Page 144 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement With the exception of the IS95 CDMA standards, the "Adjust Settings" function sets the resolution bandwidth (RBW) as a function of the channel bandwidth: "RBW ≤ 1/40 of channel bandwidth" The maximum possible resolution bandwidth (with respect to the requirement RBW ≤...
Page 145 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The RMS detector can be set for the defined channel settings automatically using the "Adjust Settings" function in the "Ch Power" menu or the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box (see "Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)"...
Page 146 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Fig. 5-24: MSR signal structure Sub block and channel definition The sub blocks are defined by a specified center frequency, RF bandwidth, and num- ber of transmit channels. Fig. 5-25: Sub block definition As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions, the Tx channels are defined at absolute frequencies, rather than by a spacing relative to the (common) center fre- quency.
Page 147 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement CACLR channels If two or more sub blocks are defined, the power in the gaps between the sub blocks must also be measured (referred to as the Cumulative Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio (CACLR) power).
Page 148: Channel Power Configuration
® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Channel power results The Result Summary for MRS signal measurements is similar to the table for common signals (see chapter 5.3.2, "Channel Power Results", on page 136). However, the Tx channel results are grouped by sub blocks, and sub block totals are provided instead of a total Tx channel power.
Page 149 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration "Overview", chapter 6.1, "Configuration Overview", on page 312. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap- ter 11.5.3, "Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR",...
Page 150 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Setting a Fixed Reference for Channel Power Measurements (Set CP Reference)...154 Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)................154 Sweep Time........................ 155 Standard The main measurement settings can be stored as a standard file. When such a stand- ard is loaded, the required channel and general measurement settings are automati- cally set on the R&S FSW.
Page 151 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Note: User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to the R&S FSW. User standards created on an R&S FSW, however, are not necessarily compatible to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work there. The following parameter definitions are saved in a user-defined standard: ●...
Page 152 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement For details see chapter 5.3.6.4, "How to Manage User-Defined Configurations", on page 175. Remote command: To query all available standards: CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: F UNCtion: P OWer: S TANdard: C ATalog? on page 701 To load a standard: on page 700...
Page 153 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Noise cancellation The results can be corrected by the instrument's inherent noise, which increases the dynamic range. In this case, a reference measurement of the instrument's inherent noise is carried out. The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being analyzed (first active trace only).
Page 154 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Channel Power Levels and Density (Power Unit) By default, the channel power is displayed in absolute values. If "/Hz" is activated, the channel power density is displayed instead. Thus, the absolute unit of the channel power is switched from dBm to dBm/Hz.
Page 155 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement ● "Detector" on page 144 ● "Trace Averaging" on page 145 Note: The reference level is not affected by this function. To adjust the reference level automatically, use the Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level) function in the AUTO SET menu.
Page 156 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Channel Bandwidths The Tx channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard. The cor- rect bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard. The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display. For measurements that require channel bandwidths which deviate from those defined in the selected standard, use the IBW method ("Fast ACLR Off").
Page 157 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Odd number of Tx channels The middle Tx channel is centered to center frequency. Even number of Tx channels The two Tx channels in the middle are used to calculate the fre- quency between those two channels.
Page 158: Msr Aclr Configuration
® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL sta- tus registry (see "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 636). Remote command: on page 711 CALCulate: L IMit: A CPower[: S TATe] on page 708 CALCulate:...
Page 159 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement is selected (see "Standard" on page 150), the "ACLR Setup" dialog box is replaced by the "MSR ACLR Setup" dialog box. To display the "MSR ACLR Setup" dialog box, do one of the following: ●...
Page 160 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Standard The main measurement settings can be stored as a standard file. When such a stand- ard is loaded, the required channel and general measurement settings are automati- cally set on the R&S FSW. However, the settings can be changed. Predefined stand- ards are available for standard measurements, but standard files with user-defined configurations can also be created.
Page 161 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The following parameter definitions are saved in a user-defined standard: ● Number of adjacent channels ● Channel bandwidth of transmission (Tx), adjacent (Adj) and alternate (Alt) chan- nels ● Channel spacings ●...
Page 162 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement For details see chapter 5.3.6.4, "How to Manage User-Defined Configurations", on page 175. Remote command: To query all available standards: CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: F UNCtion: P OWer: S TANdard: C ATalog? on page 701 To load a standard: on page 700...
Page 163 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolu- tion bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled when- ever one of these parameters is changed. A disable message is displayed on the screen.
Page 164 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Power Mode The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace ("Clear/Write"), or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed ("Max Hold"). In the latter case, the power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm.
Page 165 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement For details on MSR signals see chapter 5.3.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 145. For details on setting up channels, see chapter 5.3.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement", on page 174.
Page 166 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Sub block Center Frequency ← Sub block Definition Defines the center of an MSR sub block. Note that the position of the sub block also affects the position of the adjacent gap channels (CACLR). Remote command: on page 718 [SENSe:...
Page 167 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Technology Used for Transmission ← Tx Channel Definition The technology used for transmission by the individual channel can be defined for each channel. The required channel bandwidth and use of a weighting filter are pre- configured automatically according to the selected technology standard.
Page 168 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement For details on MSR signals see chapter 5.3.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 145. For details on setting up channels see chapter 5.3.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement", on page 174.
Page 169 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL sta- tus registry (see "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 636). Remote command: on page 711 CALCulate: L IMit: A CPower[: S TATe] Adjacent Channel Definition Defines the channels adjacent to the transmission channel block in MSR signals.
Page 170 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defined for all sub- sequent alternate (ALT) channels. Thus, only one value needs to be entered if all adja- cent channels have the same bandwidth.
Page 171 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Gap (CACLR) Channel Definition Between two sub blocks in an MSR signal, two gaps are defined: a lower gap and an upper gap. Each gap in turn contains 2 channels, the CACLR channels. The channels in the upper gap are identical to those in the lower gap, but inverted.
Page 172: How To Perform Channel Power Measurements
® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Limit Checking ← Gap (CACLR) Channel Definition During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they exceed user-defined or standard-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be defined, or both, for each individual gap channel.
Page 173 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 5.3.6.2 How to Set up the Channels Channel definition is the basis for measuring power levels in certain frequency ranges. Usually, the power levels in one or more carrier (Tx) channels and possibly the adja- cent channels are of interest.
Page 174 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Example: Defining channel spacing In the default setting, the adjacent channels have the following spacing: 20 kHz ("ADJ"), 40 kHz ("ALT1"), 60 kHz ("ALT2"), 80 kHz ("ALT3"), 100 kHz ("ALT4"), … If the spacing of the first adjacent channel ("ADJ") is set to 40 kHz, the spacing of all other adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 2 to result in 80 kHz ("ALT1"), 120 kHz ("ALT2"), 160 kHz ("ALT3"), …...
Page 175 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 8. Define the settings for the two (upper or lower) gap (CACLR) channels; since the upper and lower channels are identical, it is only necessary to configure two chan- nels. ●...
Page 176: Measurement Examples
® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement To load a user-defined configuration 1. In the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, select the "Manage User Standards" button to display the "Manage" dialog box. 2. Select the user standard file. 3.
Page 177 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 5.3.7.1 Measurement Example 1 – ACPR Measurement on an CDMA2000 Signal Test setup: Signal R&S FSW Generator Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU): Frequency: 850 MHz Level: 0 dBm Modulation: CDMA2000 Procedure: 1.
Page 178 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Fig. 5-26: Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA2000 1x signal 5.3.7.2 Measurement Example 2 – Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W-CDMA Uplink Signal Test setup: Signal R&S FSW Generator Signal generator settings (e.g.
Page 179 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The R&S FSW sets the channel configuration to the W-CDMA standard for mobiles with two adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel. The frequency span, the resolution and video bandwidth and the detector are automatically set to the correct values.
Page 180 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Fig. 5-28: Dynamic range for ACLR measurements on W-CDMA uplink signals as a function of the mixer level The level of the W-CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis, i.e. the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation.
Page 181 ® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 5.3.7.3 Measurement Example 3 – Measuring the Intrinsic Noise of the R&S FSW with the Channel Power Function Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement func- tions.
Page 182: Optimizing And Troubleshooting The Measurement
® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Fig. 5-29: Measurement of the R&S FSW's intrinsic noise power in a 1.23 MHz channel band- width. 5.3.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement If the results do not meet your expectations, or if you want to minimize the measure- ment duration, try the following methods to optimize the measurement: ●...
Page 183: Reference: Predefined Cp/Aclr Standards
® Measurements R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 5.3.9 Reference: Predefined CP/ACLR Standards When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement, the test parameters for the channel and adjacent-channel measurements are configured automatically. You can select a predefined standard via the "CP / ACLR Standard" softkey in the "Ch Power"...
Page 184: Carrier-To-Noise Measurements
® Measurements R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements Standard Remote parameter APCO-25 P2 PAPCo25 User Standard USER Customized Standard <string> For the R&S FSW, the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission chan- nel.
Page 185: Carrier-To-Noise Results
® Measurements R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements ● The carrier is outside the analyzed channel: In this case, it is sufficient to switch on the desired measurement function and to set the channel bandwidth. The carrier/ noise ratio is displayed on the screen. ●...
Page 186: Carrier-To-Noise Configuration
® Measurements R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements 5.4.3 Carrier-to-Noise Configuration The Carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N) and the Carrier-to-noise ratio in relation to the band- width (C/N ) measurements are selected via the corresponding button in the "Select Measurement" dialog box. The measurement is started immediately with the default settings.
Page 187: How To Determine The Carrier-To-Noise Ratio
® Measurements R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to. To shift marker 1 and measure another trace, use the "Marker to Trace" softkey in the "Marker" menu (see "Assigning the Marker to a Trace" on page 300).
Page 188: Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (Obw)
® Measurements R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) 5.5 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) An important characteristic of a modulated signal is its occupied bandwidth. In a radio communications system, for instance, the occupied bandwidth must be limited to enable distortion-free transmission in adjacent channels. ●...
Page 189 ® Measurements R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) OBW within defined search limits - multicarrier OBW measurement in one sweep The occupied bandwidth of the signal can also be determined within defined search limits instead of for the entire signal. Thus, only a single sweep is required to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal.
Page 190: Obw Results
® Measurements R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) 5.5.2 OBW Results As a result of the OBW measurement the occupied bandwidth ("Occ BW") is indicated in the marker results. Furthermore, the marker at the center frequency and the tempo- rary markers are indicated. The measurement is performed on the trace with marker 1.
Page 191: Obw Configuration
® Measurements R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) 5.5.3 OBW Configuration OBW measurements are selected via the "OBW" button in the "Select Measurement" dialog box. The measurement is started immediately with the default settings. It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the "Occupied Bandwidth" dialog box, which is displayed as a tab in the "Analysis"...
Page 192 ® Measurements R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) Channel Bandwidth Defines the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel in single-carrier measure- ments. This bandwidth is used to optimize the test parameters (for details see "Adjust Settings" on page 192). The default setting is 14 kHz. For measurements according to a specific transmission standard, define the bandwidth specified by the standard for the transmission channel.
Page 193: How To Determine The Occupied Bandwidth
® Measurements R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) 5.5.4 How to Determine the Occupied Bandwidth How to determine the OBW for a single signal 1. Select the "OBW" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dialog box. 2. Select the "OBW Config" softkey to display the "Occupied Bandwidth" configuration dialog box.
Page 194: Spectrum Emission Mask (Sem) Measurement
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 1. Preset the R&S FSW. 2. Set the center frequency to 800 MHz. 3. Set the reference level to -10 dBm. 4. Select the "OBW" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dialog box.
Page 195: Typical Applications
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement SEM measurement configurations can be saved to an xml file which can then be exported to another application or loaded on the R&S FSW again at a later time. Some predefined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected standard.
Page 196 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Fig. 5-30: Spectrum Emission Mask result displays In addition to the graphical results of the SEM measurement displayed in the diagram, a result summary is displayed to evaluate the limit check results (see also chap- ter 5.6.4.2, "Limit Lines in SEM Measurements",...
Page 197 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement on page 224). By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change the settings to display only peaks that exceed a threshold ("Margin"). In addition to listing the peaks in the Result Summary, detected peaks can be indicated by blue squares in the diagram (see Show Peaks in the "List Evaluation"...
Page 198: Sem Basics
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Fig. 5-32: SEM results for multiple sub blocks Retrieving Results via Remote Control The measurement results of the spectrum emission mask test can be retrieved using the CALC:LIM:FAIL? command from a remote computer; see CALCulate:...
Page 199 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 5.6.4.1 Ranges and Range Settings In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements, a range defines a segment for which you can define the following parameters separately: ● Start and stop frequency ● ● ●...
Page 200 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ● The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz. ● The individual ranges must not overlap (but may have gaps). ● The maximum number of ranges is 30 (in firmware versions < 1.60: 20 ranges). ●...
Page 201 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement power levels in adjacent channels, whereas for lower input levels the allowed deviation may be stricter. Up to four different power classes can be defined. 5.6.4.2 Limit Lines in SEM Measurements On the R&S FSW, the spectrum emission mask is defined using limit lines. Limit lines allow you to check the measured data (that is, the trace results) against specified limit values.
Page 202 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Table 5-11: Limit check types Limit check type Pass/fail criteria Limit line definition Absolute Absolute power levels may not Defined by the "Abs Limit Start"/ "Abs Limit exceed limit line Stop" values for each range Relative Power deviations relative to the TX Defined by the "Rel Limit Start"/ "Rel Limit...
Page 203 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, a margin (threshold) for the peak values to be displayed in the Result Summary can be defined in the "List Evaluation" settings. For details see chapter 5.6.5.7, "List Evaluation (Results Configu- ration)", on page 224.
Page 204 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Fast SEM not supported for multiple sub blocks For SEM with multiple sub blocks, fast SEM is not available. If more than 1 sub block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting, this setting is disabled.
Page 205 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 5.6.4.4 Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) SEM Measurements Multi-standard radio (MSR) measurements allow you to perform SEM tests on signals with multiple carriers using different digital standards. MSR measurements are descri- bed in the specification 3GPP TS 37.141. Various typical combinations of standards for base station tests are described, e.g.
Page 206 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Fast SEM not supported for multiple sub blocks For SEM with multiple sub blocks, fast SEM is not available. If more than 1 sub block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting, this setting is disabled.
Page 207 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement This leads to the following combinations for overlapping ranges: ● "MAX+MAX": maximum of the two limit lines is used ● "MAX+SUM": maximum of the two limit lines is used ● "SUM+SUM": sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used ●...
Page 208: Sem Configuration
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Global SEM limit check For the complete SEM measurement, which may consist of multiple sub blocks, only one single limit check is performed. A single limit line is calculated according to the individual range limit lines and the defined functions for overlapping ranges.
Page 209: Sweep List
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Multi-SEM configuration As of firmware version 1.91, and in the Spectrum application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels (see chapter 5.6.4.5, "SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("Multi-SEM")", on page 205).
Page 210 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Range Start / Range Stop................... 210 Fast SEM........................211 Filter Type........................211 RBW..........................211 VBW..........................211 Sweep Time Mode...................... 211 Sweep Time........................ 212 Ref. Level........................212 RF Att. Mode....................... 212 Attenuator......................212 Preamp........................212 Transd. Factor......................212 Limit Check <n>......................
Page 211 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency. The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency. The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current "TX Bandwidth" (see "Channel Power Settings"...
Page 212 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Sweep Time Sets the sweep time value for the range. For details on the sweep time see chapter 6.5.1.7, "How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time", on page 407 Remote command: on page 746 [SENSe:...
Page 213 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Limit Check <n> Sets the type of limit check for the n-th power class in the range. Up to four limits are possible. For details on limit checks see chapter 5.6.4.2, "Limit Lines in SEM Measurements", on page 201.
Page 214 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement For more information see "Relative limit line functions" on page 202. Remote command: [SENSe: ] ESPectrum<sb>: R ANGe<range>: L IMit<PClass>: R ELative: S TARt on page 740 [SENSe: ] ESPectrum<sb>: R ANGe<range>: L IMit<PClass>: R ELative: S TOP on page 742 [SENSe:...
Page 215: Multi-Sem (Sub Block) Settings
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Delete Range Deletes the currently focused range, if possible (The reference range cannot be deleted. A minimum of 3 ranges is required.) The range numbers are updated accord- ingly. Remote command: on page 735 [SENSe:...
Page 216: Reference Range
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Sub Block Count......................216 Sub Block Center Frequency..................216 Standard / MSR Settings.....................216 Edit sweep list......................216 Sub Block Count Defines the number of sub blocks. By default, the familiar SEM measurement with just one single block of ranges is configured.
Page 217 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Power Reference Type....................217 Channel Power Settings....................217 └ Bandwidth....................217 └ RRC Filter State....................217 └ Alpha......................218 Power Reference Type Defines how the reference power is calculated. "Channel Power" Measures the channel power within the reference range using the integration bandwidth method (see also "IBW method"...
Page 218: Power Classes
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Alpha ← Channel Power Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter (if activated). Remote command: on page 748 [SENSe: ] ESPectrum<sb>: F ILTer[: R RC]: A LPHa 5.6.5.4 Power Classes In the "Power Classes"...
Page 219: Msr Settings
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement PMin/PMax Defines the power limits for each power class. The first range always starts at -200 dBm (-INF) and the last range always stops at 200 dBm (+INF). These fields cannot be modified.
Page 220 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Band Category......................220 Base Station Class......................220 Base Station Maximum Output Power................ 221 Bands.......................... 221 Base Station RF Bandwidth..................221 Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge..............221 Power GSM Carrier.....................221 Apply to SEM......................222 Band Category Defines the band category for MSR measurements, i.e.
Page 221 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Base Station Maximum Output Power Defines the maximum output power of the base station. Possible values are from 0 to 100 dBm in 1 dB steps. This setting is only available for base stations with a medium range Base Station Class.
Page 222: Standard Files
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141 V12.2.0. Remote command: on page 757 [SENSe: ] ESPectrum<sb>: M SR: G SM: C ARR Apply to SEM Configures the SEM sweep list according to the specified MSR settings.
Page 223 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement The "Path" contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder. The "Files" list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path. The default storage location for the SEM settings files is: C:\R_S\instr\sem_std. Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode.
Page 224: List Evaluation (Results Configuration)
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Delete Standard Deletes the selected standard. Standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz can also be deleted. A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stand- ard. Note: Restoring predefined standard files. The standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the "Restore Stand- ards"...
Page 225: How To Perform A Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement List Evaluation (Result Summary) State Activates or deactivates the Result Summary. Remote command: on page 760 CALCulate<n>: E SPectrum: P SEarch|PEAKsearch: A UTO on page 922 TRACe<n>[: D ATA] Show Peaks If activated, all peaks that have been detected during an active SEM measurement are marked with blue squares in the Spectrum diagram.
Page 226 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ● "To perform an MSR SEM measurement" on page 227 ● "To perform a Multi-SEM measurement" on page 228 To select an SEM measurement ► Press the MEAS key, then select the "Spectrum Emission Mask" measurement. To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard ►...
Page 227 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 6. Define the measurement parameters for each range as required. If symmetrical setup is activated, you only have to configure the ranges to one side of the center range. In particular, define the limits for each range of the signal, i.e. the area in which the signal level may deviate without failing the limit check.
Page 228 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 6. Start a sweep. The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the Result Summary. If activated, the peak power levels for each range are also indica- ted in the Spectrum diagram. 7.
Page 229 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement How to load an SEM settings file 1. From the file selection dialog box, select the settings file (with an ".xml" extension). 2. Select the "Load" button. The settings from the selected file are restored to the R&S FSW and you can repeat the SEM measurement with the stored settings.
Page 230: Measurement Example: Multi-Sem Measurement
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 3. If necessary, change the "Decimal Separator" to "COMMA" for evaluation in other languages. 4. Select the "Save" button. 5. In the file selection dialog box, select a storage location and file name for the result file.
Page 231: Reference: Sem File Descriptions
® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 5. Select the "Sub Blocks" softkey and define a subblock count of 2. 6. For sub block A, define the settings for the 3GPP/FDD signal: a) Set the center frequency to 900 MHz b) Select "MSR Settings".
Page 232 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Emission Mask" dialog box and save the XML file afterwards. This way, no modifica- tions have to be done in the XML file itself. In addition to saving the current settings to a file, settings files can also be created independently of the R&S FSW, in an external application.
Page 233 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement The "Range" element This element is embedded in the "PowerClass" element. It contains the settings infor- mation of the range. There have to be at least three defined ranges: one reference range and at least one range to either side of the reference range. The maximum num- ber of ranges is 30.
Page 234 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement  </Range> … </PowerClass> ● The "Range" element is structured as follows: – <Range Index="n"> <Name="Name"> <ChannelType>"Channel Type"</Channel Type> <WeightingFilter> <Type>"FilterType"</Type> <RollOffFactor>"Factor"</RollOffFactor> <Bandwith>"Bandwidth"</Bandwidth> </WeightingFilter> <FrequencyRange> <Start>"RangeStart"</Start>...
Page 235 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand. LinkDirection Name Downlink | Uplink | None ShortName DL | UL Reference- Power Method TX Channel Power | TX Channel Peak Power Reference- <string> Channel Table 5-14: Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element Child Node Attribute...
Page 236 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand. WeightingFilter Only if Referen- cePower method is TX Channel Power and the range is the ref- erence range Type RRC | CFilter Type of the weighting filter Roll Off Factor 0…1 Excess bandwidth of the fil-...
Page 237 ® Measurements R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand. ReferenceLevel Value <power in dBm> "Ref. Level" on page 212 Yes, if the Refer- enceLevel child node is used Unit Defines dBm as unit Yes, if the Refer- enceLevel node is used RFAttenuation...
Page 238: Spurious Emissions Measurement
® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement File contents Explanation x-Unit;Hz; y-Unit;dBm; List evaluation settings Margin;200; Peak List margin Reference range settings RefType; CPOWER; Reference power type TxBandwidth;3840000;;Hz Channel power settings Filter State; ON; Alpha;0.22; PeaksPerRange;1; Max. number of peaks per range to be detected Values;2;...
Page 239: Spurious Emissions Measurement Results
® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement ally measured across a wide frequency range. The Spurious Emissions measurement allows a flexible definition of all parameters. A result table indicates the largest devia- tions of the absolute power from the limit line for each range, and the results can be checked against defined limits automatically.
Page 240: Spurious Emissions Basics
® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change the settings to: ● Display all peaks ● Display a certain number of peaks per range ● Display only peaks that exceed a threshold ("Margin") In addition to listing the peaks in the list evaluation, detected peaks can be indicated by blue squares in the diagram.
Page 241 ® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Defining ranges by remote control In Spurious Emissions measurements, there are no remote commands to insert new ranges between existing ranges directly. However, you can delete or re-define the existing ranges to create the required order. A remote command example for defining parameters and ranges in Spurious Emis- sions measurements is described in chapter 11.5.7.6, "Programming Example: Spuri-...
Page 242: Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration
® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement The limit check is considered to be "failed" if any signal level outside the absolute limits is measured. In addition to the limit line itself, the largest deviations of the absolute power from the limit line for each range are displayed in the evaluation list if the limit check is activa- ted.
Page 243 ® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Range Start / Range Stop................... 243 Filter Type........................243 RBW..........................244 VBW..........................244 Sweep Time Mode...................... 244 Sweep Time........................ 244 Detector........................244 Ref. Level........................244 RF Att. Mode....................... 245 Attenuator......................245 Preamp........................245 Sweep Points......................245 Stop After Sweep......................
Page 244: Rbw
® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement For details on filter types see chapter 6.5.1.6, "Which Data May Pass: Filter Types", on page 406. Remote command: on page 768 [SENSe: ] LIST: R ANGe<range>: F ILTer: T YPE Sets the RBW value for this range. For details on the RBW see chapter 6.5.1.1, "Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution...
Page 245: Rf Att. Mode
® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement For details on the reference level see chapter 6.4.1.1, "Reference Level", on page 393. Remote command: on page 772 [SENSe: ] LIST: R ANGe<range>: R LEVel RF Att. Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation. For details on attenuation see chapter 6.4.1.2, "RF Attenuation",...
Page 246: Limit Check
® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement For details on transducers see chapter 9.2, "Basics on Transducer Factors", on page 566. Remote command: on page 773 [SENSe: ] LIST: R ANGe<range>: T RANsducer Limit Check Activates or deactivates the limit check for all ranges. For details on limit checks see chapter 5.7.3.2, "Limit Lines in Spurious Measure- ments",...
Page 247 ® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement List Evaluation State....................247 Show Peaks........................ 247 Margin......................... 247 Details......................... 247 Peaks per Range......................248 Saving the Evaluation List...................248 List Evaluation State Activates or deactivates the list evaluation. Remote command: on page 760 CALCulate<n>: E SPectrum: P SEarch|PEAKsearch: A UTO on page 922 TRACe<n>[:...
Page 248: How To Perform A Spurious Emissions Measurement
® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Includes all detected peaks (up to a maximum defined by "Peaks per Range"). Includes only one peak per range. Peaks per Range Defines the maximum number of peaks per range that are stored in the list. Once the selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range.
Page 249: Reference: Ascii Export File Format (Spurious)
® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement ● To indicate the determined peaks in the display, activate the "Show Peaks" option. ● To restrict peak detection, define a "Margin". Only peaks that exceed this value are detected. ● To allow for more peaks per range to be detected than the default 1, increase the "Peaks Per Range"...
Page 250 ® Measurements R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement File contents Explanation Version;1.00; Firmware version Date;31.Mar 11; Storage date of data set Mode;ANALYZER; SPURIOUS; Operating mode and measurement function Center Freq;13250000000.000000;Hz X-axis settings Freq Offset;0.000000;Hz Span;26499982000.000000;Hz x-Axis;LIN; Start;9000.000000;Hz Stop;8000000000.000000;Hz Level Offset;0.000000;dB Y-axis settings Ref Position;100.000000;% y-Axis;LOG;...
Page 251: Statistical Measurements (Apd, Ccdf)
® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) 5.8 Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) To measure the amplitude distribution, the R&S FSW has simple measurement func- tions to determine both the Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD) and the Comple- mentary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF). Only one of the signal statistic func- tions can be switched on at a time.
Page 252: Apd And Ccdf Results
® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) ple. CDMA transmission modes in particular may have power peaks that are large compared to the average power. For signals of this kind, the transmitter must provide large reserves for the peak power to prevent signal compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver.
Page 253 ® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa- tion: ● Number of samples used for calculation ● For each displayed trace: – Mean amplitude – Peak amplitude –...
Page 254: Apd And Ccdf Basics - Gated Triggering
® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Mean Mean power Peak Peak power Crest Crest factor (peak power – mean power) 10 % Level values over 10 % above mean power Level values over 1 % above mean power 0,1 % Level values over 0,1 % above mean power 0,01 % Level values over 0,01 % above mean power...
Page 255: Apd And Ccdf Configuration
® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) 5.8.5 APD and CCDF Configuration Configuration consists of the following settings: ● Basic Settings....................... 255 ● Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF............257 ● Scaling for Statistics Diagrams................259 5.8.5.1 Basic Settings APD measurements are selected via the "APD"...
Page 256 ® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) dialog boxes, which are displayed as a tab in the "Analysis" dialog box or when you select the "APD Config" softkey from the "APD" menu or the "CCDF Config" softkey from the "CCDF" menu. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap- ter 11.5.8, "Analyzing Statistics (APD,...
Page 257 ® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Number of Samples Defines the number of power measurements that are taken into account for the statis- tics. For statistics measurements with the R&S FSW, the number of samples to be mea- sured is defined instead of the sweep time. Since only statistically independent sam- ples contribute to statistics, the sweep or measurement time is calculated automatically and displayed in the channel bar ("Meas Time").
Page 258 ® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Up to three ranges can be defined for each of the six available traces. Comment........................258 Period..........................258 Range <x> Use......................258 Range <x> Start/Stop....................258 Comment An optional comment can be defined for the gate range settings of each trace. Remote command: on page 780 [SENSe:...
Page 259 ® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Note: You can define the time values with a greater numerical resolution than is dis- played; the values are only rounded for display. Remote command: on page 780 [SENSe: ] SWEep: E GATe: T RACe<k>: S TARt<range> on page 781 [SENSe:...
Page 260 ® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) X-Axis Defines the scaling settings for signal level values. Range ← X-Axis Defines the level range in dB to be evaluated by the statistics measurement. Remote command: on page 783 CALCulate<n>: S TATistics: S CALe: X : R ANGe Ref Level ←...
Page 261: How To Perform An Apd Or Ccdf Measurement
® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) x-axis ref level: -10 dBm x-axis range APD: 100 dB x-axis range CCDF: 20 dB y-axis upper limit: y-axis lower limit: 1E-6 Remote command: on page 782 CALCulate<n>: S TATistics: P RESet Adjust Settings Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min- imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution.
Page 262: Examples
® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) b) Define the stop time of range 1 at the duration of the first pulse. c) Activate range 1 by setting "Range 1 Use" to On. d) Define the start time of range 2 as (duration of pulse 1 + duration of interval) e) Define the stop time of range 2 as (start time of range 2 + duration of pulse 2) Activate range 2 by setting "Range 2 Use"...
Page 263 ® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Trigger Offset t2 – t1 = 25 µs now the gate ranges are relative to t2 Range1 Start t3 – t2 = 15 µs start of range 1 relative to t2 Range1 End t4 –...
Page 264 ® Measurements R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Fig. 5-37: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise 4. Now select the "CCDF" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dia- log box. Fig. 5-38: CCDF of white noise The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power. The level above the mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph.
Page 265: Optimizing And Troubleshooting The Measurement
® Measurements R&S Time Domain Power Measurement 5.8.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement If the results do not meet your expectations, try the following methods to optimize the measurement: ● Make sure the defined bandwidth is wide enough for the signal bandwidth of the device under test to be fully analyzed (see "Analysis Bandwidth"...
Page 266: Time Domain Power Basics - Range Definition Using Limit Lines
® Measurements R&S Time Domain Power Measurement Mode Description Mean Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof. The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calcula- ted. For example to measure the mean power during a GSM burst Std Dev The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean value.
Page 267: Time Domain Power Configuration
® Measurements R&S Time Domain Power Measurement 5.9.4 Time Domain Power Configuration Time Domain Power measurements are selected via the "Time Domain Power" button in the "Select Measurement" dialog box. The measurement is started immediately with the default settings. It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the "Time Domain Power"...
Page 268: How To Measure Powers In The Time Domain
® Measurements R&S Time Domain Power Measurement Left Limit / Right Limit Defines a power level limit for line S1 (left) or S2 (right). Remote command: on page 935 CALCulate: M ARKer: X : S LIMits: L EFT on page 935 CALCulate:...
Page 269: Harmonic Distortion Measurement
® Measurements R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement Procedure: 1. Preset the R&S FSW. 2. Set the center frequency to 1.8 GHz. 3. Set the RBW to 100 kHz. μ s. 4. Set the sweep time to 640 5. Set the trigger source to "IF Power". μ...
Page 270: About The Measurement
® Measurements R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement ● About the Measurement..................270 ● Harmonic Distortion Basics................... 270 ● Harmonic Distortion Results..................273 ● Harmonic Distortion Configuration................ 273 ● How to Determine the Harmonic Distortion............275 5.10.1 About the Measurement With this measurement it is possible to measure the harmonics easily, for example from a VCO.
Page 271 ® Measurements R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement measuring the harmonic distance of a DUT can be calculated relatively easily using the second harmonic intercept. As shown in figure 5-39, the level of the 2 harmonic drops by 20 dB if the level of the fundamental wave is reduced by 10 dB.
Page 272 ® Measurements R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement Rules for measuring high harmonic ratios The following rules for measuring high harmonic ratios can be derived: ● Select the smallest possible IF bandwidth for a minimal noise floor. ● Select an RF attenuation which is high enough to measure the harmonic ratio only. The maximum harmonic distortion is obtained if the level of the harmonic equals the intrinsic noise level of the receiver.
Page 273: Harmonic Distortion Results
® Measurements R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement 5.10.3 Harmonic Distortion Results As a result of the harmonics distortion measurement, the zero span sweeps of all detected harmonics are shown in the diagram, separated by red display lines. This pro- vides a very good overview of the measurement. In addition, a result table is displayed providing the following information: ●...
Page 274 ® Measurements R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement monic Distortion" dialog box, which is displayed as a tab in the "Analysis" dialog box or when you select the "Harmonic Distortion Config" softkey from the "Harm Dist" menu. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap- ter 11.5.10, "Measuring the Harmonic Distortion",...
Page 275: How To Determine The Harmonic Distortion
® Measurements R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Adjust Settings If harmonic measurement was performed in the frequency domain, a new peak search is started in the frequency range that was set before starting the harmonic measure- ment. The center frequency is set to this frequency and the reference level is adjusted accordingly.
Page 276: About The Toi Measurement
® Measurements R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement 5.11.1 About the TOI Measurement If several signals are applied to a transmission two-port device with nonlinear charac- teristic, intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of the signals. The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals which intermodulate at the characteristic.
Page 277 ® Measurements R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Fig. 5-40: Intermodulation products Ps1 and Ps2 The intermodulation product at f is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal P and signal P Tthe intermodulation product at f is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal P and signal P = 2 ×...
Page 278 ® Measurements R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Fig. 5-41: Dependency of intermodulation products on level of useful signals The useful signals at the two-port output increase proportionally with the input level as long as the two-port is in the linear range. A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a level change of 1 dB at the output.
Page 279 ® Measurements R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Intermodulation-free dynamic range The "Intermodulation-free dynamic range", i.e. the level range in which no internal intermodulation products are generated if two-tone signals are measured, is deter- mined by the third order intercept point, the phase noise and the thermal noise of the signal analyzer.
Page 280: Toi Results
® Measurements R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Fig. 5-43: Intermodulation-free dynamic range as a function of level at the input mixer and of the selected resolution bandwidth (Useful signal offset = 10 to 100 kHz, DANL = -145 dBm/Hz, TOI = 15 dBm; typical val- ues at 2 GHz).
Page 281: Toi Configuration
® Measurements R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Remote command The TOI can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate<n>: on page 800. MARKer<m>: F UNCtion: T OI: R ESult? 5.11.4 TOI Configuration Third Order Intercept (TOI) measurements are selected via the "Third Order Intercept" button in the "Select Measurement"...
Page 282: How To Determine The Third Order Intercept
® Measurements R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap- ter 11.5.11, "Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point", on page 799. Marker 1/2/3/4......................282 Search Signals......................282 Marker 1/2/3/4 Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the TOI measurement (see chapter 5.11.3, "TOI Results",...
Page 283: Measurement Example - Measuring The R&S Fsw's Intrinsic Intermodulation
® Measurements R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement 5.11.6 Measurement Example – Measuring the R&S FSW's Intrinsic Inter- modulation Test setup: Signal Generator 1 Coupler R&S FSW [- 6 dB] Signal Generator 2 Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S FSW SMU): Device Level Frequency...
Page 284 ® Measurements R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement The third order intercept (TOI) is displayed in the marker information. 2. The level of a signal analyzer's intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the RF level of the useful signals at the input mixer. When the RF attenuation is added, the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased.
Page 285: Am Modulation Depth Measurement
® Measurements R&S AM Modulation Depth Measurement 5.12 AM Modulation Depth Measurement Using the R&S FSW you can measure the AM modulation depth of a modulated signal. ● About the Measurement..................285 ● AM Modulation Depth Results................285 ● AM Modulation Depth Configuration..............
Page 286: Am Modulation Depth Configuration
® Measurements R&S AM Modulation Depth Measurement Remote command: The AM modulation depth can also be queried using the remote command on page 802. CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: F UNCtion: M DEPth: R ESult? 5.12.3 AM Modulation Depth Configuration AM Modulation Depth measurements are selected via the "AM Modulation Depth" but- ton in the "Select Measurement"...
Page 287: Optimizing And Troubleshooting The Measurement
® Measurements R&S AM Modulation Depth Measurement Marker 1/2/3 Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the AM Modulation Depth measurement: Marker Description Maximum of the signal (= carrier level) Offset of next peak to the right of the carrier Offset of the next peak to the left of the carrier The marker positions can be edited;...
Page 288: How To Determine The Am Modulation Depth
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) 5.12.5 How to Determine the AM Modulation Depth 1. Apply a modulated carrier signal to the R&S FSW input. 2. On the R&S FSW, press the MEAS key. 3. Select the "AM Modulation Depth" measurement function from the "Select Mea- surement"...
Page 289: Emi Measurement Results
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) The first stage, or peak search, is used to get a rough idea about the location of peak levels that may indicate interference over the required frequency range. You can use a detector that allows for a fast sweep time, e.g.
Page 290: Emi Measurement Basics
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) Final test results - Result Summary The results of the final EMI tests at the active marker frequencies are displayed in the Result Summary. The Result Summary provides the following information: Label Description Type...
Page 291: Detectors And Dwell Time
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) ● 120 kHz ● 1 MHz (not with Quasipeak detector, see "Quasipeak detector (CISPR filter only)" on page 292) Military (MIL Std) ● 10 Hz ● 100 Hz ● 1 kHz ●...
Page 292 ® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) ● Pulsed signals: the time must be long enough to capture at least one complete pulse Average detector The average detector displays the average signal level of the samples that were collec- ted during the specified dwell time.
Page 293 ® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) Band A Band B Band C/D Discharge time 500 ms 160 ms 550 ms Time lag of the simulated 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms pointer instrument Consider the following when defining the dwell time: ●...
Page 294: Frequency Resolution - Sweep Points And Scaling
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) When you change the frequency or the attenuation, the R&S FSW waits until the low- pass filter has settled before starting the measurement. In this case, the measurement time depends on the resolution bandwidth and the characteristics of the signal. RMS Average detector (CISPR filter only) The RMS Average detector is a combination of the RMS detector (for pulse repetition frequencies above a corner frequency) and the Average detector (for pulse repetition...
Page 295: Controlling V-Networks (Lisn)
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point (more is better). If this condition is not met, signals or interferences could be missed during refined measure- ment of narrowband interferers. If the distance between two sweep points is larger than RBW/3, a warning is displayed in the status bar ("Increase sweep points").
Page 296: Using Transducer Factors
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) Table 5-19: Supported networks and phases Network type Phases Two-line V-networks ESH3-Z5 N, L1 ENV216 N, L1 Four-line V-networks ESH2-Z5 N, L1. L2, L3 ENV4200 N, L1. L2, L3 For the ENV216 network, a 150 kHz high pass filter is available to protect the input of the R&S FSW.
Page 297: Final Measurement At The Marker Position
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) R&S FSW looks for the strongest peaks in the frequency range you are measuring and positions a marker on those peaks after each sweep. If a limit line is assigned to the trace, the peak search is based on the level difference between the trace and the limit line.
Page 298: Limit Checks
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) advantage of an immediate final measurement is that it eliminates the risk of measure- ment errors based on frequency drifts of the disturbance signal. The final measurement at the marker frequency may have a different detector than during the initial peak search.
Page 299: Emi Measurement Configuration
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) 5.13.4 EMI Measurement Configuration On the R&S FSW, EMI measurement configuration consists of the following settings, most of which are accessible from the main EMI menu. This menu is displayed when you select the EMI measurement and then press the MEAS CONFIG key.
Page 300: Marker Type
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) Marker Type Toggles the marker type. The type for marker 1 is always "Normal", the type for delta marker 1 is always "Delta". These types cannot be changed. Note: If normal marker 1 is the active marker, switching the "Mkr Type" activates an additional delta marker 1.
Page 301: Final Test Detector
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) If a trace is turned off, the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva- ted. Remote command: on page 932 CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: T RACe Final Test Detector Defines the detector to be used for the final EMI test at the marker frequency. This set- ting is only available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed.
Page 302: Emi Final Measurement Configuration
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) Remote command: Marker selected via suffix <m> in remote commands. 5.13.4.2 EMI Final Measurement Configuration The final EMI measurement can be performed with different settings than the initial peak search. These settings are described here. The detector to be used for the final EMI test can be defined differently for each fre- quency, thus the detector is configured in the EMI marker settings, see "Final Test...
Page 303 ® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) Note: The EMI-specific filter types are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measure- ment option is installed, even if EMI measurement is not active. For details see chap- ter 5.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 290.
Page 304: Lisn Control Settings
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) By default, the frequency axis has linear scaling. Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis, however, is common for EMI measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhances the resolution of the lower frequencies. On the other hand, high frequencies get more crowded and become harder to distinguish.
Page 305 ® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) For more information see chapter 5.13.3.4, "Controlling V-Networks (LISN)", on page 295. LISN Type........................305 Phase.......................... 305 150 kHz Highpass Filter....................305 LISN Type Selects the network type and activates output to the network via the user port of the R&S FSW.
Page 306: Emi Result Analysis
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) The filter is available for the ENV 216 network only. Remote command: INPut: L ISN: F ILTer: H PASs[: S TATe] on page 806 5.13.5 EMI Result Analysis The R&S FSW EMI measurement provides functionality to analyze the results. Marker Demodulation The R&S FSW is able to demodulate AM and FM signals for acoustic tests and moni- toring purposes.
Page 307 ® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) The EMI main menu is displayed. 5. Select the "EMI Config" softkey and define the resolution bandwidth and filter type to be used for the measurement. By default, the R&S FSW uses a filter with a 3 db bandwidth. EMI measurements usually require a filter with a 6 dB bandwidth.
Page 308: Measurement Example: Measuring Radio Frequency Interference
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) b) In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "View filter" option: "Show compati- ble". All stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instrument that are compatible to the current EMI measurement settings are displayed in the overview.
Page 309 ® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) 2. Define the frequency range of the measurement. a) Press the FREQ key. b) Press the "Start Frequency" softkey and enter a frequency of 150 kHz. c) Press the "Stop Frequency" softkey and enter a frequency of 1 GHz. The R&S FSW scales the horizontal axis accordingly.
Page 310: Optimizing And Troubleshooting Emi Measurements
® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) a) Select the "Marker Config" softkey and activate six normal markers. b) Set markers 1 to 3 on trace 1. Set markers 4 to 6 on trace 2. c) For each of these markers, select the "CISPR AV" detector to be used for the "Final Test", i.e.
Page 311 ® Measurements R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement (R&S FSW-K54) Dwell time Consider the following when defining the dwell time: ● Unknown signals: select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly ●...
Page 312: Common Measurement Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Configuration Overview 6 Common Measurement Settings Basic measurement settings that are common to many measurement tasks, regardless of the application or operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a spe- cific measurement task, using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Ana- lyzer mode, or an application other than the Spectrum application, be sure to check the specific application or mode description for settings that may deviate from these com- mon settings.
Page 313 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Configuration Overview 1. "Select Measurement" chapter 5.1, "Available Measurement Functions", on page 110 2. Input chapter 6.2.2, "Input Source Settings", on page 318 3. Amplitude chapter 6.4, "Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration", on page 393 4.
Page 314: Data Input And Output
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 6.2 Data Input and Output The R&S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output (such as video or trigger signals). ● Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output..........
Page 315 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output source to this connector in the RF input configuration (see "Input Connector" on page 320). The probe's attenuation is compensated automatically by the R&S FSW using a trans- ducer named "Probe on Baseband Input I". (The probe can only be connected on I, as only input at the I connector can be redirected to the RF path).
Page 316 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Microbutton action You can define an action to be performed by the R&S FSW when the probe's microbut- ton (if available) is pressed. Currently, a single data acquisition via the probe can be performed simply by pressing the microbutton.
Page 317 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Trigger output The R&S FSW can provide output to another device either to pass on the internal trig- ger signal, or to indicate that the R&S FSW itself is ready to trigger. The trigger signal can be output by the R&S FSW automatically, or manually by the user.
Page 318: Input Source Settings
383). IF 2 GHz Output For instrument models R&S FSW43/50/67, the IF output can also be provided at the alternative IF OUT output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz and with a bandwidth of 2 GHz. The IF output can then be analyzed by a different instrument, for example an R&S®RTO oscilloscope.
Page 319 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 6.2.2.1 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R&S FSW is "Radio Frequency", i.e. the signal at the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R&S FSW. If no additional options are installed, this is the only available input source.
Page 320 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output This value also affects the unit conversion (see "Reference Level" on page 396). Remote command: on page 866 INPut: I MPedance High-Pass Filter 1...3 GHz Activates an additional internal high-pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz.
Page 321: Power Sensors
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 6.2.2.2 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the "Input" dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT/OUTPUT key and then "Input Source Config". For each possible probe connector (Baseband Input I, Baseband Input Q), the detec- ted type of probe, if any, is displayed.
Page 322 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 6.2.3.1 Basics on Power Sensors For precise power measurement up to 4 power sensors can be connected to the instru- ment via the power sensor interface (on the front panel). Both manual operation and remote control are supported.
Page 323 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger Power sensors can be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level, e.g. from a signal generator. Currently, only the following power sensors are supported as power triggers: ●...
Page 324 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output The "Gate Mode" Level is not supported for R&S power sensors. The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded, rather than a time period. However, only time periods can be used for gating in level mode. Thus, the trig- ger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement;...
Page 325 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output └ External Trigger Level...................328 └ Hysteresis..................... 328 └ Trigger Holdoff....................328 └ Drop-Out Time....................328 └ Slope......................328 State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off. Note that in addition to this general setting, each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select...
Page 326 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output For details on the zeroing process refer to "How to Zero the Power Sensor" on page 330. Remote command: on page 895 CALibration: P METer: Z ERO: A UTO ONCE Frequency Manual Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured.
Page 327 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement (Meas->Ref) Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display. The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting.
Page 328 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output For details on using a power sensor as an external trigger, see "Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger" on page 323. Remote command: on page 904 [SENSe: ] PMETer: T RIGger[: S TATe] TRIG:SOUR PSE, see on page 854 TRIGger[:...
Page 329 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level, e.g. from a signal generator. This is described in "How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External (PSE) Trigger"...
Page 330 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 10. To use the power sensor as an external power trigger, select the "External Power Trigger" option and define the trigger settings. For details see "How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External (PSE) Trigger" on page 330.
Page 331: External Generator Control (Option R&S Fsw-B10)
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 6. In the "Trigger and Gate" dialog box, select "Signal Source" = "PSE". The R&S FSW is configured to trigger when the defined conditions for the power sensor occur. Power measurement results are provided as usual. 6.2.4 External Generator Control (Option R&S FSW-B10) If the R&S FSW External Generator Control (R&S FSW-B10) is installed, you can oper- ate various commercially available generators as an external generator with the...
Page 332 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output External Generator Connections The external generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the EXT. GEN. CONTROL GPIB interface of the R&S FSW supplied with the R&S FSW-B10 option. For more information on configuring interfaces see chapter 10.1.1, "Remote Control Interfaces and...
Page 333 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup (e.g. frequency response of connecting cables). Fig. 6-4: Test setup for transmission measurement Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection-coefficient mea- surement bridge.
Page 334 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Overview of Generators Supported by the R&S FSW-B10 Option Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SGS100A12 SMP02 SMP03 SMA01A SMA100A3 SMP04 SMA100A6 SMP22 SMB100A1 SMR20 SMB100A12 SMR20B11 SMB100A2 SMR27 SMB100A20 SMR27B11 SMB100A3...
Page 335 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMIQ02E SMW06 SMIQ03 SMIQ03B SMY01 SMIQ03E SMY02 SMIQ04B HP8254A SMIQ06B HP8257D SMJ03 HP8340A SMJ06 HP8648 SML01 HP ESG-A Series 1000A, 2000A, 3000A, 4000A SML02 HP ESG B Sereies SML03...
Page 336 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by connecting the R&S FSW to the signal generator. The R&S FSW sends a predefined list of fre- quencies to the signal generator (see also "Coupling the Frequencies"...
Page 337 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output tion of the intermediate values is applied. If the span increases, the values at the left or right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop fre- quency, i.e.
Page 338 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output zation is activated, the offsets in the reference trace are removed from the current measurement results to compensate for the inherent distortions. Reference line The reference line is defined by the Reference Value Reference Position in the...
Page 339 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output approximate normalization is possible, it is important to consider the required frequen- cies for calibration in advance. The frequencies and levels supported by the connected signal generator are provided for reference with the interface configuration. Two different methods are available to define the frequencies for calibration, that is to couple the frequencies of the R&S FSW with those of the signal generator: ●...
Page 340 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output TTL synchronization Some Rohde & Schwarz signal generators support TTL synchronization when connec- ted via GPIB. The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the R&S FSW-B10 option. When pure GPIB connections are used between the R&S FSW and the signal genera- tor, the R&S FSW sets the generator frequency for each frequency point individually via GPIB, and only when the setting procedure is finished, the R&S FSW can measure...
Page 341: Error And Status Messages
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Example: Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency = 100 MHz AnalyzerStart = 200 MHz AnalyzerStop = -150 MHz Offset = 20 MHz Numerator = Denominator = 1 →F = 50 MHz GeneratorStart →F = 50 MHz via Fmin...
Page 342 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Message Description "Ext. Generator Command Error!" Missing or wrong command in the generator setup file (see "Generator Setup Files" on page 335 "Ext. Generator Visa Error!!" Error with Visa driver provided with installation (very unlikely) Overloading At a reference level of -10 dBm and at a external generator output level of the same...
Page 343 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output For more information on configuring interfaces see chapter 10.1.1, "Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols", on page 609. Generator Type......................343 Interface........................343 Handshake......................343 GPIB Address / TCP/IP Address.................344 Reference........................344 Edit Generator Setup File....................344 Frequency Min.
Page 344 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output For an overview of which generators support TTL synchronization see "Overview of Generators Supported by the R&S FSW-B10 Option" on page 334. Remote command: on page 888 SYSTem: C OMMunicate: R DEVice: G ENerator: L INK GPIB Address / TCP/IP Address For LAN connections: TCP/IP address of the signal generator For GPIB connections: GPIB address of the signal generator.
Page 345 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Source State....................... 345 Source Power......................345 Source Offset......................345 Source Frequency Coupling..................346 (Manual) Source Frequency..................346 (Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset).......346 Result Frequency Start....................346 Result Frequency Stop....................347 Source State Activates or deactivates control of an external generator. Remote command: on page 886 SOURce:...
Page 346 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Source Frequency Coupling Defines the frequency coupling mode between the R&S FSW and the generator. For more information on coupling frequencies see "Coupling the Frequencies" on page 338. "Auto" Default setting: a series of frequencies is defined (one for each sweep point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R&S FSW (see "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denomi-...
Page 347 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Result Frequency Stop For reference only: The stop frequency for the generator, calculated from the config- ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the R&S FSW. Source Calibration Functions The calibration functions of the external generator are available in the "Source Calibra- tion"...
Page 348 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements. The order of the two calibration meas- urements is irrelevant. Remote command: on page 890 [SENSe:...
Page 349 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Note: Note that the normalized measurement data is used, not the reference trace! Thus, if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration, without changing any settings, the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span (by definition of the nor- malized trace).
Page 350 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup using an External Generator 1. Connect the signal generator's GPIB interface connector to the EXT. GEN.CONTROL GPIB connector on the rear panel of the R&S FSW. 2.
Page 351 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 18. Optionally, shift the reference line further down in the result display by descreasing the "Reference": "Position". The measurement setup is now calibrated. Subsequent measurement results are normalized, so that any unwanted effects from the cables and connectors are removed.
Page 352 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 6. Perform any measurement with the setup that contains the calibrated component. The measurement results do not include the effects from the component. How to Compensate for Additional Gain or Attenuation after Calibration If a gain or an attenuation is inserted in the measurement after calibration, this effect can be reflected in the display of the normalized trace on the R&S FSW.
Page 353 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 2. Connect the signal generator output to the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R&S FSW. 3. Adapt the measurement range of the R&S FSW to the filter to be tested. In this measurement, define the following settings: a) Press the FREQ key, select "Frequency Config"...
Page 354 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output the connecting cables from subsequent measurements with the band elimination filter. The reference line is displayed at 0 dB at the top of the diagram (100%). Fig. 6-8: Normalized measurement results after calibration Measuring the effects of the DUT After calibration we can insert the band elimination filter (our DUT) in the measurement setup.
Page 355 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Fig. 6-9: Band elimination filter results 3. Shift the reference line from the top of the diagram to the middle of the diagram by changing the position of the reference point 0.0 dB to 50 %. In the "Source Calibration"...
Page 356 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Compensating the effects of additional attenuation after calibration After calibration, an additional attenuator is inserted between the DUT and the R&S FSW. This may be necessary, for example, to protect the analyzer's input con- nector.
Page 357 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Fig. 6-12: Reference line with an offset of -3 dB and shifted to middle of diagram (50%) 3. After the reference trace has been shifted, you can zoom into the measured trace to determine the offsets to the reference line, which represent the effects of the band elimination filter in the measurement setup.
Page 358: External Mixer (Option R&S Fsw-B21)
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 6.2.5 External Mixer (Option R&S FSW-B21) If the R&S FSW External Mixer option (R&S FSW-B21) is installed, an external mixer can be connected to the R&S FSW to increase the available frequency range. In this case, the input to measure is not taken from the RF input connector, but from the EXT MIXER connector(s).
Page 359 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output : intermediate frequency (variable; defined internally depending on RBW and span) Thus, depending on the required frequency band, the appropriate order of harmonic must be selected. For commonly required frequency ranges, predefined-bands with the appropriate harmonic order setting are provided.
Page 360 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Two-port mixer Three-port mixer In both cases, the nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm. Bias Current Single-diode mixers generally require a DC voltage which is applied via the LO line. This DC voltage is to be tuned to the minimum conversion loss versus frequency. Such a DC voltage can be set via the "BIAS"...
Page 361 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output biasing it is not important to know the exact current flowing through the diode since the conversion loss must be set to a minimum with the frequency. Therefore, it makes no difference whether the setting is performed by an open-circuit voltage or by a short-cir- cuit current.
Page 362 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● the table must contain at least one frequency that lies within the frequency range for the band Reference level The maximum possible reference level depends on the maximum used conversion loss value.
Page 363 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output The reference sweep is performed using an LO setting shifted downwards by 2*IF/ <Harmonic order>. Input signals in the desired sideband that are converted using the specified harmonic are displayed in both traces at the same position on the frequency axis.
Page 364 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Note that the Auto ID method operates according to the fail-safe principle, i.e. unwan- ted mixer products may not be detected as such but signals which are in fact real input signals are not blanked out.
Page 365 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Fig. 6-17: Different mixer products displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference sweep (large span) Example: The external mixer is set to use the 2nd order harmonic. The signal recorded in the test sweep is displayed by trace 1.
Page 366 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Fig. 6-18: Unwanted mixer products displayed for small span 6.2.5.2 External Mixer Settings The external mixer is configured in the "External Mixer" tab of the "Input" dialog box which is available when you do one of the following, if the R&S FSW-B21 option is installed: ●...
Page 367 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output External Mixer State....................367 RF Start / RF Stop.......................367 Handover Freq......................368 Band..........................368 Overrange......................368 Preset Band........................ 368 Mixer Type........................368 Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)..............368 └ Harmonic Type....................369 └ Range 1/2..................... 369 └...
Page 368 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Handover Freq. Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next (if two different ranges are selected). The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range. Remote command: on page 870 [SENSe:...
Page 369 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Harmonic Type ← Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration) Defines if only even, only odd, or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion. Depending on this selection, the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes (see "Harmonic Order"...
Page 370 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output "Table" Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list. Pre- defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R&S FSW. Alternatively, you can define your own conversion loss tables.
Page 371 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification. Two sweeps are performed alter- nately. Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band (USB) of the LO (the test sweep), trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band (LSB), i.e. the reference sweep.
Page 372 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Write to <CVL table name> ← Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected "Conversion loss table" for the range (see "Managing Conversion Loss Tables" on page 372). If no conversion loss table is selected yet, this function is not available ("CVL Table not selected").
Page 373 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Edit Table Opens the "Edit Conversion loss table" dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table. For details on table configuration see "Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables" on page 373. Remote command: on page 878 [SENSe:...
Page 374 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output File Name........................374 Comment........................375 Band..........................375 Harmonic Order......................375 Bias..........................375 Mixer Name.........................375 Mixer S/N........................375 Mixer Type........................376 Position/Value......................376 Insert Value......................... 376 Delete Value........................376 Shift x.......................... 376 Shift y.......................... 376 Save..........................376 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C:\r_s\instr\user\cvl\ directory on the instrument.
Page 375 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table. The comment can be freely defined by the user. Remote command: on page 876 [SENSe: ] CORRection: C VL: C OMMent Band The waveguide or user-defined band for which the table is to be applied.
Page 376 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two-port or three-port type. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Page 377 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● "To connect a three-port mixer" on page 377 ● "To connect a two-port mixer" on page 378 ● "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 378 ● "To define a new conversion loss table" on page 379 ●...
Page 378 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output To connect a two-port mixer 1. 1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the R&S FSW to the LO/IF port of the external mixer. The nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm. Because of the diplexer contained in the R&S FSW, the IF signal can be tapped from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer.
Page 379 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output To define a new conversion loss table 1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss Table". 2. Select "New Table". 3. Define a file name and, optionally, a comment for the new table. 4.
Page 380 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 380 ● "To take into account the cable loss in the IF path" on page 381 To set up the measurement Fig.
Page 381: Output Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ters. If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is dis- played. If no conversion loss table is available yet, create a new table first (as described in "To define a new conversion loss table"...
Page 382 The measured IF value is available at the IF OUT output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz (with a bandwidth of 2 GHz). This setting is only available for instrument models R&S FSW43/50/67. For further prerequisites see "IF 2 GHz Output"...
Page 383 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output IF (Wide) Out Frequency Defines or indicates the frequency at which the IF signal level is provided at the IF/ VIDEO/DEMOD connector if IF/VIDEO/DEMOD Output is set to "IF". Note: The IF output frequency of the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector cannot be defined manually, but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency.
Page 384: Frequency And Span Configuration
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration "Device Trig- (Default) Sends a trigger when the R&S FSW triggers. gered" "Trigger Sends a (high level) trigger when the R&S FSW is in "Ready for trig- Armed" ger" state. This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus:OPERation reg- ister (bit 5), as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port (pin 9).
Page 385: Impact Of The Frequency And Span Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration 6.3.1 Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration. ● Defining the Scope of the Measurement - Frequency Range.......
Page 386 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration found within the searched bandwidth. If no maximum signal above a defined threshold value is found in the searched bandwidth, the center frequency remains unchanged. The search bandwidth and the threshold value are shown in the diagram by red lines which are labeled as "TRK".
Page 387: Frequency And Span Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration Thus, for logarithmic x-axis scaling, the number of sweep points must be sufficiently high in order to distinguish high frequencies precisely. The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point (that means: the distance between two sweep points should not exceed the RBW).
Page 388: Center Frequency
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration Center frequency......................388 Span..........................388 Start / Stop........................389 Frequency Axis Scaling....................389 Full Span........................389 Zero Span........................389 Last Span........................390 Center Frequency Stepsize..................390 Frequency Offset......................390 Signal Tracking......................391 └ Signal Tracking State..................391 └...
Page 389: Start / Stop
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration span = 0: 0 Hz span >0: span ≤ f ≤ f span and span are specified in the data sheet. For more information see chapter 6.3.1.1, "Defining the Scope of the Measurement - Frequency Range", on page 385.
Page 390: Last Span
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration Last Span Sets the span to the previous value. With this function you can switch between an overview measurement and a detailed measurement quickly. Remote command: on page 833 [SENSe: ] FREQuency: S PAN Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed.
Page 391: How To Define The Frequency Range
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration This parameter has no effect on the R&S FSW hardware, or on the captured data or on data processing. It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre- quency values are displayed.
Page 392: How To Move The Center Frequency Through The Frequency Range
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap- ter 11.7.1, "Defining the Frequency and Span", on page 830. To configure the frequency and span Frequency and span settings can be configured via the "Frequency" dialog box. Signal tracking is configured in the "Signal Tracking"...
Page 393: Amplitude And Vertical Axis Configuration
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration ● "Signal Tracking Bandwidth": the frequency range around the center frequency to be tracked ● "Signal Tracking Threshold": the minimum level the trace must reach to be detected as a maximum ●...
Page 394 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration The optimum reference level for the current measurement settings can be set automat- ically by the R&S FSW (see "Reference Level" on page 396). The reference level determines the amplitude represented by the topmost grid line in the display.
Page 395: Amplitude Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Electronic attenuation If option R&S FSW-B25 is installed, you can also activate an electronic attenuator. For details see "Using Electronic Attenuation (Option B25)" on page 398. 6.4.1.3 Scaling In a linear display, the measurement values are distributed linearly throughout the grid. That means the entire range of measured values is divided by the number of rows in the grid (10) and each row corresponds to 1/10 of the total range.
Page 396 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Reference Level......................396 └ Shifting the Display (Offset)................397 └ Unit........................397 └ Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level).......397 Attenuation......................398 └ Attenuation Mode / Value................398 Using Electronic Attenuation (Option B25)..............398 Input Settings......................
Page 397 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Shifting the Display (Offset) ← Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the measured level irrespec- tive of the selected unit. The scaling of the y-axis is changed accordingly. Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R&S FSW so the application shows correct power results.
Page 398 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input. Attenuation Mode / Value ← RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level (Auto mode).
Page 399: Scaling The Y-Axis
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration The parameters "Input Coupling" and "Impedance" are identical to those in the "Input" settings, see chapter 6.2.2, "Input Source Settings", on page 318. Preamplifier (option B24) ← Input Settings If option R&S FSW-B24 is installed, a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal.
Page 400 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration To configure the y-axis scaling settings Vertical Axis settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the "Amplitude" dialog box. ► To display the "Amplitude" dialog box, do one of the following: ●...
Page 401: How To Optimize The Amplitude Display
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration For spectrograms, this value defines the position of the reference level value within the span covered by the color map. In this case, the value is given in %, where 0 % corre- sponds to the maximum (right end) and 100 % to the minimum (left end) of the color map.
Page 402: Bandwidth, Filter And Sweep Configuration
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration ● Reduce the "Range" of the y-axis to a small area around the required level. If necessary, change the "Ref Level Position" so the required range remains visi- ble. ● Select "Linear Unit"...
Page 403 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration ● Coupling Span and RBW..................404 ● How Data is Measured: the Sweep Type..............405 ● Which Data May Pass: Filter Types..............406 ● How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time.............407 ●...
Page 404 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration 6.5.1.2 Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace. Using video band- widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth, only the signal average is displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed.
Page 405 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration automatically adjusted. The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the currently set frequency span/100. The 6 dB bandwidths 200 Hz, 9 kHz and 120 kHz and the available channel filters are not changed by the coupling.
Page 406 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration On the other hand, the narrower the partial span, the more steps are required to cover the entire span, thus increasing analysis and calculation time. To optimize the sweep rate, the widest possible partial span (depending on the RBW) is used. For an optimal sweep rate, it is recommended that you set the sweep time to "Auto", as well.
Page 407 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Normal (3dB) Gaussian filters Gaussian filters provide a good compromise between steep edges and a short settling time. This filter is suitable for most measurement tasks and is used by default. The available Gaussian (3dB) sweep filters are listed in the R&S FSW data sheet.
Page 408: Bandwidth, Filter And Sweep Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration If the trace configurations "Average", "Max Hold" or "Min Hold" are set, the "sweep/ average count" also determines the number of averaging or maximum search proce- dures (see chapter 7.3.1.2, "Analyzing Several Traces - Trace Mode", on page 455).
Page 409 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Fig. 6-22: Bandwidth dialog box Fig. 6-23: Sweep dialog box for spectrogram display RBW..........................410 VBW..........................410 Sweep Time........................ 411 Span/RBW........................411 RBW/VBW ........................411 Filter Type........................412 Default Coupling......................412 User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 19...
Page 410 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Sweep/Average Count....................412 Sweep Points......................413 Optimization........................ 413 Sweep Type........................ 414 Single Sweep/ RUN SINGLE..................414 Continuous Sweep/RUN CONT.................. 415 Continue Single Sweep....................415 Spectrogram Frames....................415 └ Selecting a frame to display................415 └...
Page 411 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Sweep Time Defines the duration of a single sweep, during which the defined number of sweep points are measured. The sweep time can be defined automatically or manually. The allowed sweep times depend on the device model; refer to the data sheet. For more information see chapter 6.5.1.7, "How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time",...
Page 412 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration "Manual" The coupling ratio is defined manually. The RBW/VBW ratio can be set in the range of 0.001 to 1000. Remote command: on page 838 [SENSe: ] BANDwidth|BWIDth: V IDeo: A UTO on page 839 [SENSe:...
Page 413 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration For spectrogram displays, the sweep count determines how many sweeps are com- bined in one frame in the spectrogram, i.e. how many sweeps the R&S FSW performs to plot one trace in the spectrogram result display. For more details see "Time Frames"...
Page 414 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration For zero span measurements, the optimization mode defines the selection of the A/D converter prefilter. Table 6-3: Optimization parameters in zero span mode Optimization mode Description Dynamic The narrowest filter possible (depending on the RBW) is used. Speed The widest filter possible (depending on the RBW) is used.
Page 415 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration If the Sequencer is off, only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated. For details on the Sequencer, see chapter 4.5.1, "The Sequencer Concept", on page 105. Remote command: on page 694 INITiate[:...
Page 416: Reference: List Of Available Rrc And Channel Filters
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped, and only if a spectrogram is selected. The most recent frame is number 0, all previous frames have a negative number. For more information see "Time Frames"...
Page 417 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Table 6-4: Filter types Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz CFILter 200 Hz CFILter 300 Hz CFILter 500 Hz CFILter 1 kHz CFILter 1.5 kHz CFILter 2 kHz CFILter 2.4 kHz CFILter 2.7 kHz...
Page 418: Trigger And Gate Configuration
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 kHz CFILter 150 kHz CFILter FM Radio 192 kHz CFILter 200 kHz CFILter 300 kHz CFILter 500 kHz CFILter J.83 (8-VSB DVB, USA) 1 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1.228 MHz...
Page 419: Basics Of Triggering And Gated Measurements
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration 6.6.1 Basics of Triggering and Gated Measurements Some background knowledge on triggering and gated measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings. ● Triggered measurements..................419 ●...
Page 420 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Pre-trigger offsets are possible because the R&S FSW captures data continuously in the time domain, even before the trigger occurs. "Trigger Offset" on page 431. Trigger Hysteresis Setting a hysteresis for the trigger helps avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise, for example.
Page 421 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Drop-Out Fig. 6-25: Effect of the trigger drop-out time "Drop-Out Time" on page 431. Drop-out times for falling edge triggers If a trigger is set to a falling edge ("Slope" = "Falling", see "Slope"...
Page 422 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Frame 2 Frame 1 Holdoff Fig. 6-27: Effect of the trigger holdoff "Trigger Holdoff" on page 431. 6.6.1.2 Gated Measurements Like a gate provides an opening in a fence, a gated measurement lets data from the input signal pass in defined areas only.
Page 423 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Fig. 6-28: Effects of Gate mode, Gate delay and Gate length User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 19...
Page 424 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Example: By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is inactive, the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed without the superposi- tion of frequency components generated during switching. Similarly, the spectrum can also be analyzed for an inactive carrier.
Page 425: Trigger And Gate Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep, "GAT" and the gate source is displayed in the channel bar. 6.6.1.3 Determining the Parameters in Preview Mode The preview mode allows you to try out trigger and gate settings before actually apply- ing them to the current measurement.
Page 426 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration For step-by-step instructions on configuring triggered and gated measurements, see chapter 6.6.3, "How to Configure a Triggered and Gated Measurement", on page 434. Preview........................427 └ Frequency..................... 427 └ RBW......................427 └ Sweep Time....................
Page 427 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Preview The preview diagram displays a zero span measurement at the center frequency with the defined RBW and sweep time. For details see chapter 6.6.1.3, "Determining the Parameters in Preview Mode", on page 425.
Page 428 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration (See "Squelch" on page 517). Remote command: on page 854 TRIGger[: S EQuence]: S OURce on page 857 [SENSe: ] SWEep: E GATe: S OURce Free Run ← Trigger Source ← Trigger Settings No trigger source is considered.
Page 429 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Video mode is only available in the time domain, and not for I/Q-based data. Remote command: TRIG:SOUR VID, see on page 854 TRIGger[: S EQuence]: S OURce SWE:EGAT:SOUR VID for gated triggering, see [SENSe:...
Page 430 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration A "Trigger Offset", "Trigger Polarity" and "Trigger Holdoff" (to improve the trigger stabil- ity) can be defined for the RF trigger, but no "Hysteresis". Remote command: TRIG:SOUR RFP, see on page 854 TRIGger[:...
Page 431 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration The repetition interval should be set to the exact pulse period, burst length, frame length or other repetitive signal characteristic. Remote command: on page 855 TRIGger[: S EQuence]: T IME: R INTerval Drop-Out Time ←...
Page 432 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Slope ← Trigger Settings For all trigger sources except time and frequency mask (Realtime only) you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it. For gated measurements in "Edge"...
Page 433 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Pulse Length ← Output Type ← Trigger 2/3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector. Remote command: on page 860 OUTPut: T RIGger<port>: P ULSe: L ENGth Send Trigger ←...
Page 434: How To Configure A Triggered And Gated Measurement
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Gate Length ← Gate Settings Defines how long the gate is open when it is triggered. The gate length can only be set in the edge-triggered gate mode. In the level-triggered mode the gate length depends on the level of the gate signal.
Page 435 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration 5. If the results are as expected, close the dialog box to keep the changes perma- nently. Otherwise, correct the settings as necessary. 6.6.3.2 How to Configure a Triggered Measurement To define a time trigger: 1.
Page 436: How To Output A Trigger Signal
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration 6.6.3.3 How to Configure a Gated Measurement 1. Determine the required parameters as described in chapter 6.6.3.1, "How to Deter- mine the Required Trigger/Gate Parameters", on page 434. 2. The gate is opened by a trigger event, which must be based on a power source. Define the trigger as described in chapter 6.6.3.2, "How to Configure a Triggered Measurement",...
Page 437: Adjusting Settings Automatically
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Adjusting Settings Automatically The configured trigger is output to the connector. 6.7 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R&S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings. In order to do so, a measurement is performed. The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually.
Page 438 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Adjusting Settings Automatically ● Auto Level Remote command: on page 861 [SENSe: ] ADJust: A LL Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically (Auto Freq) This function adjusts the center frequency automatically. The optimum center frequency is the frequency with the highest S/N ratio in the fre- quency span.
Page 439 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Adjusting Settings Automatically Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted. In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal, you can define a hysteresis. This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below (compared to the last mea- surement) before the reference level is adapted automatically.
Page 440: Common Analysis And Display Functions
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration 7 Common Analysis and Display Functions General methods and basic settings to display and analyze measurements, regardless of the operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a specific measure- ment task, using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, or an application other than the Spectrum application, be sure to check the specific application or mode description for settings and functions that may deviate from these...
Page 441 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration Diagram........................441 Marker Table....................... 441 Marker Peak List......................441 Result Summary......................442 Spectrogram........................442 Diagram Displays a basic level vs. frequency or level vs. time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically. This is the default evaluation method. Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the "Trace"...
Page 442: Laying Out The Result Display With The Smartgrid
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration You can define search and sort criteria to influence the results of the analysis (see "Marker Search Settings" on page 498). Remote command: LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, PEAK, see on page 822 LAYout:...
Page 443 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration Principally, the layout of the windows on the screen is based on an underlying grid, the SmartGrid. However, the SmartGrid is dynamic and flexible, allowing for many different layout possibilities. The SmartGrid functionality provides the following basic features: ●...
Page 444 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration Fig. 7-1: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode The brown area indicates the possible "drop area" for the window, i.e. the area in which the window can be placed. A blue area indicates the (approximate) layout of the window as it would be if the icon were dropped at the current position.
Page 445 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration SmartGrid functions Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and move functions. The "Move" icon allows you to move the position of the window, possibly changing the size and position of the other displayed windows.
Page 446 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration Remote command: on page 822 / on page 826 LAYout: A DD[: W INDow]? LAYout: W INDow<n>: A DD? 7.1.2.4 How to Close a Result Window ► To close a window, activate SmartGrid mode and select the "Delete" icon for the window.
Page 447: Zoomed Displays
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays 7.2 Zoomed Displays You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the measurement results in greater detail. Using the touchscreen or a mouse pointer you can easily define the area to be enlarged.
Page 448: Zoom Functions
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays Fig. 7-4: Multiple zoom Using the zoom area to restrict a peak search The selected zoom area can be used to restrict the search range for a peak search, but only in single zoom mode (see "Using Zoom Limits"...
Page 449: How To Zoom Into A Diagram
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays In multiple zoom mode, you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane- ously. An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace, while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows. The zoom area that corre- sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner, between the scrollbars.
Page 450 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays 2. Select the area in the diagram to be enlarged on the touchscreen. The selected area is indicated by a dotted rectangle. When you leave the touchscreen, the diagram is replaced by the zoomed trace area.
Page 451: Trace Configuration
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration To return to original display ► Click on the "Zoom Off" icon in the toolbar. The original trace display is restored. Zoom mode remains active, however. To switch off zoom mode and return to selection mode, select the "Selection mode" icon in the toolbar.
Page 452: Basics On Setting Up Traces
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration ● Basics on Setting up Traces................. 452 ● Trace Configuration....................464 ● How to Configure Traces..................477 7.3.1 Basics on Setting up Traces Some background knowledge on traces is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings.
Page 453 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace information by an abbreviation. Table 7-1: Detector types Detector Abbrev. Description Positive Peak Determines the largest of all positive peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point Negative Peak Determines the smallest of all negative peak values of the levels measured at...
Page 454 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Sweep point n Sweep point n+1 video video Video signal signal Signal SAMPLE s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 MAX PEAK AUTO PEAK MIN PEAK The trace detector for the individual traces can be selected manually by the user or set automatically by the R&S FSW.
Page 455 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 7.3.1.2 Analyzing Several Traces - Trace Mode If several sweeps are performed one after the other, or continuous sweeps are per- formed, the trace mode determines how the data for subsequent traces is processed. After each sweep, the trace mode determines whether: ●...
Page 456 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration If the level range or reference level is changed, the R&S FSW automatically adapts the trace data to the changed display range. This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace. 7.3.1.3 How Many Traces are Averaged - Sweep Count + Sweep Mode In "Average"...
Page 457 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration After the selected number of sweeps the average trace is saved in the trace mem- ory. Until this number of sweeps is reached, a preliminary average is displayed. When the averaging length defined by the "Sweep Count" is attained, averaging is continued in continuous sweep mode or for "Continue Single Sweep"...
Page 458 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 7.3.1.6 Working with Spectrograms In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" or "level versus time" traces, the R&S FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data. A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency, the y-axis shows the time.
Page 459 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Fig. 7-7: Screen layout of the spectrogram result display 1 = Spectrum result display 2 = Spectrogram result display 3 = Current frame indicator 4 = Timestamp / frame number 5 = Color map 6 = Marker 7 = Delta marker 8 = Marker list...
Page 460 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Sweep Points Max. History Depth 4001 6247 8.001 3124 16.001 1562 32.001 The scaling of the time axis (y-axis) is not configurable. However, you can enlarge the spectrogram display by maximizing the window using the "Split/Maximize" key on the front panel.
Page 461 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Displaying individual frames The spectrogram diagram contains all stored frames since it was last cleared. Arrows on the left and right border of the spectrogram indicate the currently selected frame. The spectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame. The current frame number is indicated in the diagram footer, or alternatively a time- stamp, if activated.
Page 462 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low levels, red colors indi- cate high ones. ● Cold Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low levels, blue colors indicate high ones.
Page 463 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Example: Fig. 7-8: Linear color curve shape = 0; colors are distributed evenly over the complete result range In the color map based on the linear color curve, the range from -105.5 dBm to -60 dBm is covered by blue and a few shades of green only.
Page 464: Trace Configuration
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker.
Page 465 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6............465 Trace Mode......................... 465 Detector........................466 Hold..........................466 Average Mode......................467 Average Count......................467 Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config..............467 Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4 (Softkeys)............... 468 Copy Trace........................468 Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6...
Page 466 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration "Clear Write" Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. This is the default setting. The "Detector" is automatically set to "Auto Peak". "Max Hold" The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis- played.
Page 467 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Normally, the measurement is started anew after parameter changes, before the mea- surement results are analyzed (e.g. using a marker). In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes, the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results (e.g.
Page 468 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1: Clear Write Auto Detector (Auto Peak) Traces 2-6: Blank Auto Detector Set Trace Mode Trace 1: Max Hold Max | Avg | Min Auto Detector (Positive Peak) Trace 2: Average...
Page 469 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 7.3.2.2 Trace Math Trace math settings can be configured via the TRACE key, in the "Trace Math" tab of the "Traces" dialog box. Trace Math Function....................469 Trace Math Off......................470 Trace Math Position....................
Page 470 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Trace Math Off Deactivates any previously selected trace math functions. Remote command: CALC:MATH:STAT OFF, see on page 920 CALCulate<n>: M ATH: S TATe Trace Math Position Defines the zero point on the y-axis of the resulting trace in % of the diagram height. The range of values extends from -100 % to +200 %.
Page 471 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Trace and data export settings can be configured in the "Traces" dialog box ("Trace/ Data Export" tab). Export all Traces and all Table Results...............471 Include Instrument Measurement Settings..............471 Trace to Export......................471 Decimal Separator......................
Page 472 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating-point numerals for the data export files. Eval- uation programs require different separators in different languages. Remote command: on page 991 FORMat: D EXPort: D SEParator Export Trace to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format (.dat) to the specified file and directory.
Page 473 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration General Spectrogram Settings This section describes general settings for spectrogram display. They are available when you press the TRACE key and then select the "Spectrogram Config" softkey. State..........................473 Selecting a frame to display..................
Page 474 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration History Depth Sets the number of frames that the R&S FSW stores in its memory. The maximum number of frames depends on the Sweep Points. For an overview of the maximum number of frames depending on the number of sweep points, see table 7-3.
Page 475 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration While the measurement is running, the "Single Sweep" softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high- lighted softkey or key again. Note: Sequencer.
Page 476 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Fig. 7-12: Color Mapping dialog box = Color map: shows the current color distribution = Preview pane: shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color scheme = Color curve pane: graphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme 4/5 = Color range start and stop sliders: define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram...
Page 477: How To Configure Traces
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Set to Default Sets the color mapping to the default settings. Remote command: on page 917 DISPlay[: W INDow<n>]: S GRam|SPECtrogram: C OLor: D EFault 7.3.3 How to Configure Traces The following step-by-step procedures describe the following tasks: ●...
Page 478 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration How to Copy Traces 1. A trace copy function is provided in a separate tab of the "Traces" dialog box. To display this tab do one of the following: ● Select the TRACE key and then the "Trace Copy" softkey. ●...
Page 479 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration a) Stop the continuous measurement or wait until the single sweep is completed. b) Select the frame number in the diagram footer. c) Enter the required frame number in the edit dialog box. Note that the most recent sweep is frame number 0, all previous frames have negative numbers.
Page 480 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 4. If necessary, adapt the color mapping for the spectrogram to a different value range or color scheme as described in "How to Configure the Color Mapping" on page 480. How to Configure the Color Mapping The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs.
Page 481 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 2. Select and drag the top color curve slider (indicated by a gray box at the right of the color curve pane) to the highest value you want to include in the color mapping. To set the value range numerically 1.
Page 482: Marker Usage
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider ► Select and drag the color curve shape slider (indicated by a gray box in the middle of the color curve) to the left or right. The area beneath the slider is focussed, i.e. more colors are distributed there.
Page 483: Basics On Markers And Marker Functions
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Markers in Spectrogram Displays In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker.
Page 484 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage ● Alternatively, change the position of the selected marker using the rotary knob. By default, the marker is moved from one pixel to the next. If you need to position the marker more precisely, change the step size to move from one sweep point to the next (General Marker Setting).
Page 485 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Temporary markers are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to analyze the measurement results for special marker functions. They disappear when the asso- ciated function is deactivated. 7.4.1.2 Activating Markers Only active markers are displayed in the diagram and in the marker table.
Page 486 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage For n dB down markers, additional information is displayed, see chapter 7.4.1.9, "Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths (n dB Down Marker)", on page 490. Marker information in marker table In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram area, a separate marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram.
Page 487 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Effect of peak excursion settings (example) The following figure shows a trace to be analyzed. Fig. 7-13: Trace example The following table lists the peaks as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram above, as well as the minimum decrease in amplitude to either side of the peak: Marker # Min.
Page 488 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage ment result, keeps the delta frequency value. Therefore the phase noise measurement leads to reliable results in a certain offset although the source is drifting. Using a peak as a fixed reference marker Some results are analyzed in relation to a peak value, for example a carrier frequency level.
Page 489 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage level in 1 Hz bandwidth with reference to 1 mW. With linear amplitude units (V, A, W), the noise voltage density is analyzed in µV/√Hz, the noise current density in µA/√Hz or the noise power density in µW/√Hz.
Page 490 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 7.4.1.8 Measuring Phase Noise Phase noise is unintentional modulation of a carrier; it creates frequencies next to the carrier frequency. A phase noise measurement consists of noise density measure- ments at defined offsets from the carrier; the results are given in relation to the carrier level (dBc).
Page 491 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Fig. 7-14: n dB down marker function The following marker function results are displayed: Table 7-4: n dB down marker function results Label Description Current position and level of marker 1 Offset value (n dB down) ndB down Bw / Determined bandwidth or pulse width (zero span) at the offset...
Page 492 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements (not zero span) in the Spectrum application. The entire band must lie within the display. If it is moved out of the display, the result cannot be calculated (indicated by "- - -"...
Page 493: Marker Configuration
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage The squelch function activates the video trigger function (see "Video" on page 428) and deactivates any other trigger or gating settings. The squelch level and trigger level are set to the same value. The trigger source in the channel bar is indicated as "SQL" for squelch.
Page 494 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview. By default, the first marker is defined as a normal marker, whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker. All markers are assigned to trace 1, but only the first marker is active.
Page 495 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Marker Position (X-value) Defines the position (x-value) of the marker in the diagram. Remote command: CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: X on page 932 CALCulate<n>: D ELTamarker<m>: X on page 931 Frame (Spectrogram only) Spectrogram frame the marker is assigned to.
Page 496 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Assigning the Marker to a Trace The "Trace" setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace. The trace deter- mines which value the marker shows at the marker position. If the marker was previ- ously assigned to a different trace, the marker remains on the previous frequency or time, but indicates the value of the new trace.
Page 497 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Marker Table Display....................497 Marker Stepsize......................497 Defining a Fixed Reference..................497 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed. "On" Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram.
Page 498 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage If activated, the fixed reference marker ("FXD") can also be selected as a "Reference Marker" instead of another marker. The "Level" and "Frequency" or "Time" settings define the position and value of the ref- erence marker.
Page 499 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage ● In the "Overview", select "Analysis", and switch to the vertical "Marker Config" tab. Then select the horizontal "Search Settings" tab. Search Mode for Next Peak..................499 Exclude LO........................500 Peak Excursion......................500 Auto Max / Min Peak Search..................500 Search...
Page 500 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Exclude LO If activated, restricts the frequency range for the marker search functions. "ON" The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is ≥ 5 × resolution bandwidth (RBW). Due to the interference by the first local oscillator to the first inter- mediate frequency at the input mixer, the LO is represented as a sig- nal at 0 Hz.
Page 501 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Search Threshold ← Search Limits Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search. Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected. Remote command: on page 936 CALCulate: T HReshold Using Zoom Limits ←...
Page 502 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction..............502 Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction..............502 Marker Search Type....................503 Marker Search Area....................504 Exclude LO........................504 Peak Excursion......................505 Auto Max / Min Peak Search..................505 Search Limits......................
Page 503 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage "Down" Determines the next maximum/minimum below the current peak (in older frames). Remote command: CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: S GRam|SPECtrogram: Y : M AXimum: A BOVe on page 946 CALCulate<n>: D ELTamarker<m>: S GRam|SPECtrogram: Y : M AXimum: A BOVe on page 949 CALCulate<n>:...
Page 504 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage "XY-Search" Searches in all frames at all positions. Remote command: CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: S GRam|SPECtrogram: X Y: M AXimum[: P EAK] on page 945 CALCulate<n>: D ELTamarker<m>: S GRam|SPECtrogram: X Y: M AXimum[: P EAK] on page 949 CALCulate<n>:...
Page 505 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions. Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed;...
Page 506 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Deactivating All Search Limits ← Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits. Remote command: on page 935 CALCulate: M ARKer: X : S LIMits[: S TATe] on page 936 CALCulate: T HReshold: S TATe Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value.
Page 507: Marker Function Configuration
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage For spectrogram displays, define which frame the next minimum is to be searched in. Remote command: on page 939 CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: M INimum: N EXT on page 941 CALCulate<n>: D ELTamarker<m>: M INimum: N EXT Center Frequency = Marker Frequency Sets the center frequency to the selected marker or delta marker frequency.
Page 508 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage ● Band Power Marker....................514 ● Marker Demodulation....................515 ● Marker Peak List Configuration................517 ● Deactivating All Marker Functions.................519 7.4.3.1 Precise Frequency (Signal Count) Marker A special marker can be used to determine a particular frequency or time in a mea- sured signal very accurately.
Page 509 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 7.4.3.2 Noise Measurement Marker For each of the 16 markers noise measurement can be activated. Noise measurement markers are configured in the "Noise Measurement Config" dialog box, using the "Noise Measurement" function. The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the "Marker"...
Page 510 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram. Remote command: on page 932 CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>[: S TATe] on page 930 CALCulate<n>: D ELTamarker<m>[: S TATe] Marker Type Toggles the marker type. The type for marker 1 is always "Normal", the type for delta marker 1 is always "Delta".
Page 511 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage To display the "Phase Noise Config" dialog box, do one of the following: ● Press the MKR FUNC key, then select the "Select Marker Function" softkey. Then select the "Phase Noise" button. Select the "Phase Noise Config" softkey. ●...
Page 512 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage The "Level" and "Frequency" or "Time" settings define the position and value of the ref- erence point. Alternatively, a Peak Search can be performed to set the maximum value of the selected trace as the reference point.
Page 513 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage n dB down Marker State Activates or deactivates the special n dB down marker function. Remote command: on page 962 CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: F UNCtion: N DBDown: S TATe on page 962 CALCulate<n>:...
Page 514 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 7.4.3.6 Band Power Marker For each of the 16 markers band power measurement can be activated. Band power measurement markers are configured in the "Band Power Config" dialog box, using the "Band Power"...
Page 515 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements (not zero span) in the Spectrum application. If activated, the markers display the power or density measured in the band around the current marker position.
Page 516 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage This function is not available for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements or measure- ments on I/Q-based data. For details see chapter 7.4.1.11, "Demodulating Marker Values and Providing Audio Output", on page 492. Marker Demodulation State..................
Page 517 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage For EMI measurements, the duration of the demodulation at each marker position is limited by the dwell time of the EMI measurement marker (see "Dwell Time" on page 303). Remote command: on page 965 CALCulate<n>:...
Page 518 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Peak List State......................518 Sort Mode........................518 Maximum Number of Peaks..................518 Peak Excursion......................518 Displaying Marker Numbers..................519 Exporting the Peak List....................519 Peak List State Activates/deactivates the marker peak list. If activated, the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display.
Page 519: How To Work With Markers
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage For more information see chapter 7.4.1.4, "Searching for Signal Peaks", on page 486. Remote command: on page 934 CALCulate<n>: M ARKer: P EXCursion Displaying Marker Numbers By default, the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list.
Page 520 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 2. If the required signal point is not the maximum, continue the peak search to one of the subsequent maxima or minima: a) Press the MKR -> key. b) Select the "Next Peak" or "Next Min" key. c) If necessary, change the search settings by selecting the "Search Config"...
Page 521 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 2. For the active delta marker that is to refer to the fixed reference marker, select "FXD" from the "Ref. Marker" list. The delta marker indicates the offset of the current trace value at the marker posi- tion from the fixed reference value.
Page 522: Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 7.4.5 Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Func- tions This measurement example describes how to measure harmonics using the provided marker functions. Note that this task can be performed much simpler using the Har- monic Distortion measurement (see chapter 5.10, "Harmonic Distortion Measurement",...
Page 523: Display And Limit Lines
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Fig. 7-15: Fundamental wave and the frequency and level reference point 6. Make the step size for the center frequency correspond to the signal frequency: in the "Frequency" configuration dialog box, select "Center Frequency Stepsize = Marker".
Page 524: Basics On Display Lines
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines 7.5.1 Basics on Display Lines Display lines help you analyze a trace – as do markers. The function of a display line is comparable to that of a ruler that can be shifted on the trace in order to mark absolute values.
Page 525 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines ● The y unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting with the excep- tion of dB based units; all dB based units are compatible with each other. Validity Only limit lines that fulfill the following conditions can be activated: ●...
Page 526 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Relative scaling is suitable, for example, if masks for bursts are to be defined in zero span, or if masks for modulated signals are required in the frequency domain. Thresholds If the y-axis for the limit line data points uses relative scaling, an additional absolute threshold can be defined for the limit check.
Page 527: Settings And Functions For Display And Limit Lines
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Fig. 7-17: Margin violation for limit check Fig. 7-18: Limit violation for limit check 7.5.3 Settings and Functions for Display and Limit Lines For remote operation, see chapter 11.8.4, "Configuring Display and Limit Lines", on page 975.
Page 528 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines 7.5.3.1 Display Line Settings Two vertical and two horizontal lines can be defined in the display. Vertical Line 1/2......................528 Horizontal Line 1/2...................... 528 Vertical Line 1/2 Activates a vertical display line (F1/F2 or T1/T2) in the diagram at the specified fre- quency or point in time, depending on the frequency span.
Page 529 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines For the limit line overview, the R&S FSW searches for all stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder. The overview allows you to determine which limit lines are available and can be used for the current measurement.
Page 530 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Compatibility Indicates whether the limit line definition is compatible with the current measurement settings. For more information on which conditions a limit line must fulfill to be compatible, see chapter 7.5.2, "Basics on Limit Lines", on page 524.
Page 531 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the x-axis. Remote command: on page 979 CALCulate: L IMit<k>: C ONTrol: O FFSet Y-Offset Shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y-axis (levels or linear units such as volt) vertically.
Page 532 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Name...........................532 Comment........................532 Threshold........................532 Margin......................... 533 X-Axis..........................533 Y-Axis..........................533 Data points........................533 Insert Value......................... 534 Delete Value........................534 Shift x.......................... 534 Shift y.......................... 534 Save..........................534 Name Defines the limit line name. All names must be compatible with Windows conventions for file names.
Page 533 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Margin Defines a margin for the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no margin). For details on margins see chapter 7.5.2, "Basics on Limit Lines", on page 524. Remote command: on page 980 CALCulate:...
Page 534: How To Work With Display And Limit Lines
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Insert Value Inserts a data point in the limit line above the selected one in the "Edit Limit Line" dia- log box. Delete Value Deletes the selected data point in the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box. Shift x Shifts the x-value of each data point horizontally by the defined shift width (as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line, see...
Page 535 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines 7.5.4.2 Defining Limit Lines Limit lines are configured in the "Lines Config" dialog box. To display this dialog box, do one of the following: ● Press the LINES key and then the "Lines Config" softkey, then select the "Lines Config"...
Page 536 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines The limit checks for the deactivated limit lines are stopped and the results are removed form the display. How to edit existing limit lines Existing limit line configurations can be edited. 1.
Page 537 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines 4. Define the y-axis configuration: ● Level unit ● Absolute or relative limits ● Upper or lower limit line 5. Define the data points: minimum 2, maximum 200: a) Select "Insert Value". b) Define the x-value ("Position") and y-value ("Value") of the first data point.
Page 538: Data Management
® Data Management R&S Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration (Preset) 8 Data Management The R&S FSW allows you to store and load instrument settings, as well as import and export measurement data for analysis at a later time. Finally, you can store or print the measurement results displayed on the screen.
Page 539: Factory Default Configuration
® Data Management R&S Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration (Preset) Remote command: on page 1005 SYSTem: P RESet: C HANnel[: E XECute] 8.1.1 Factory Default Configuration The factory default configuration is selected such that the RF input is always protected against overload, provided that the applied signal levels are in the allowed range for the instrument.
Page 540: Protecting Data Using The Secure User Mode
® Data Management R&S Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode Parameter Setting noise source input 8.2 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode During normal operation, the R&S FSW uses a solid-state drive to store its operating system, instrument firmware, instrument self-alignment data, and any user data cre- ated during operation.
Page 541 ® Data Management R&S Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode Storing required data permanently Any data that is to be available for subsequent sessions with the R&S FSW, such as predefined instrument settings, transducer factors or self-alignment data, must be stored on the instrument permanently, prior to activating the secure user mode.
Page 542: Storing And Recalling Instrument Settings And Measurement Data
® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data The secure user mode setting is available in the general system configuration settings (see chapter 9.3.4.5, "General Configuration Settings", on page 581). Remote control Initially after installation of the R&S FSW-K33 option, secure user mode must be enabled manually once before remote control is possible.
Page 543: Quick Save/Quick Recall
® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data 8.3.1 Quick Save/Quick Recall The Quick Save and Quick Recall functions allow you to store instrument or channel settings very easily and quickly in one step. Up to 10 different sets of settings can be stored to or recalled from "save sets".
Page 544 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10................544 Storage Type (Save only)................... 544 Recall.......................... 545 Cancel......................... 545 QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10 Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled. At the time of storage, the "QuickSave 1 / ...
Page 545: Configurable Storage And Recall
® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Recall Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file. If the settings file contains settings for a specific channel only a new channel with the stored settings is activated, otherwise the entire instrument settings are loaded.
Page 546 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Item Description Noise - Calibration data Results from calibration measurement (R&S FSW-K30 only) K40 Results All current phase noise trace results (R&S FSW-K40 only) 8.3.2.2 Storage Location and File Name The data is stored on the internal flash disk or, if selected, on a memory stick or net- work drive.
Page 547 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Selecting the Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files.............547 File Name........................548 Comment........................548 File Type........................548 Items........................... 548 Save File........................549 Recall in New Channel / Recall in Current Channel............549 Cancel.........................
Page 548 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data For details see chapter 3.1.7, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 37. For details see "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode" in the "Data Manage- ment"...
Page 549 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Save File Saves the settings file with the defined file name. Note: Secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "Mem- ory full"...
Page 550 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Startup Recall......................550 Selecting the Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files.............550 File Name........................551 Comment........................551 Cancel......................... 551 Startup Recall Activates or deactivates the startup recall function. If activated, the settings stored in the selected file are loaded each time the instrument is started or preset.
Page 551: How To Save And Load Instrument Settings
® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data The default storage location for the SEM settings files is: C:\R_S\instr\sem_std. Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode. In secure user mode all data is stored to volatile memory, and is only available during the current instrument session.
Page 552 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data To save and recall instrument settings using the Quick Save function 1. Select the "Save" icon from the toolbar. 2. Select whether the instrument settings for all channels are to be stored, or only those for the current channel.
Page 553: Importing And Exporting Measurement Results For Evaluation
® Data Management R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation 6. Select "Recall". The settings and selected items from the saved measurement are restored and you can repeat the measurement with the same settings. To recall settings automatically after preset or reboot You can define the settings that are restored when you preset or reboot the instrument.
Page 554: Import/Export Functions
® Data Management R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation ● Import/Export Functions..................554 ● How to Export Trace Data and Numerical Results..........555 ● How to Export a Peak List..................556 ● Reference: ASCII File Export Format..............557 8.4.1 Import/Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the "Save/ Recall"...
Page 555: How To Export Trace Data And Numerical Results
® Data Management R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation In secure user mode, settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol- atile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "Memory full" error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
Page 556: How To Export A Peak List
® Data Management R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation To export trace data and table results Trace data can be exported either from the "Trace" menu, or from the "Save/Recall" menu. 1. Press the TRACE key, then select the "Trace Config" softkey and switch to the "Trace/Data Export"...
Page 557: Reference: Ascii File Export Format
® Data Management R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation 8.4.4 Reference: ASCII File Export Format Trace data can be exported to a file in ASCII format for further evaluation in other applications. This reference describes in detail the format of the export files for result data.
Page 558 ® Data Management R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation File contents Description Freq Offset;0;Hz Frequency offset Start;10000;Hz Start/stop of the display range. Stop;100000;Hz Unit: Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0, dBm/dB for statistics measurements Span;90000;Hz Frequency range (0 Hz in zero span and statistics measure- ments)
Page 559 ® Data Management R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation File contents Description Data section for individual window Window;2 ..; Name of next window Data section for individual trace Trace 1;; First trace Table 8-4: ASCII file format for spectrogram trace export File contents Description Header...
Page 560: Creating Screenshots Of Current Measurement Results And Settings
® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings File contents Description Sweep Count;20; Number of sweeps set Data section Trace 1:;; Selected trace x-Unit;Hz; Unit of x values: Hz with span > 0; s with span = 0; dBm/dB with statistics measurements y-Unit;dBm;...
Page 561 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings To print a screensot of the current display with the current settings immediately, with- out switching to the "Print" menu, use the "Print immediately" icon at the right-hand side of the toolbar.
Page 562 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Output Medium ← Device Setup Defines the medium to which the screenshot is printed or stored. "File formats" Stores the screenshot to a file in the selected format. The file name is queried at the time of storage.
Page 563 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Suppress File Name Dialog ← Device Setup When the screenshot is stored to a file, the file selection dialog box is not displayed. Instead, the current storage location and file name are used (default: C:\r_S\instr\user).
Page 564: How To Store Or Print Screenshots Of The Display
® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Install Printer Opens the standard Windows dialog box to install a new printer. All printers that are already installed are displayed. Only user accounts with administrator rights can install a printer. For further information refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation.
Page 565: General Instrument Setup
® General Instrument Setup R&S Basics on Alignment 9 General Instrument Setup Some basic instrument settings can be configured independently of the selected oper- ating mode or application. Usually, you will configure most of these settings initially when you set up the instrument according to your personal preferences or require- ments and then only adapt individual settings to special circumstances when neces- sary.
Page 566: Basics On Transducer Factors
® General Instrument Setup R&S Basics on Transducer Factors The results are available until the next self-alignment process is started or the instru- ment is switched off. Temperature check During self-alignment, the instrument's (frontend) temperature is also measured (as soon as the instrument has warmed up completely). This temperature is used as a ref- erence for a continuous temperature check during operation.
Page 567 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Basics on Transducer Factors active the reference level function is adapted automatically to obtain the best dynamic performance. If a transducer factor is active, "TDF" is displayed in the channel bar. Transducers can also be defined when an optional external mixer is used (R&S FSW- B21).
Page 568: General Instrument Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings 9.3 General Instrument Settings Instrument settings can be configured via the SETUP key. Network and Remote Settings, Display Settings Settings for network and remote operation are described in chapter 10, "Network and Remote Operation", on page 609.
Page 569 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings └ Frequency..................... 570 └ Loop Bandwidth.................... 570 Reference Frequency Output..................570 Resetting the Default Values..................571 Reference Frequency Input The R&S FSW can use the internal reference source or an external reference source as the frequency standard for all internal oscillators. A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as the internal reference source.
Page 570 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings Behavior in case of missing external reference ← Reference Frequency Input If an external reference is selected but none is available, there are different ways the instrument can react. "Show Error The message "NO REF" is displayed to indicate that no synchroniza- Flag"...
Page 571: Transducer Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings "Ouput 640 MHz" Provides a 640 MHz reference signal to the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector. "Output Sync Trigger" Provides a 100 MHz reference signal to the SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT connector. Remote command: on page 1019 [SENSe:...
Page 572 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings For the transducer line overview, the R&S FSW searches for all stored transducer lines with the file extension .TDF in the trd subfolder of the main installation folder. The overview allows you to determine which transducer lines are available and can be used for the current measurement.
Page 573 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings ● dBμA/m ● dBpW ● dBpT Compatibility Indicates whether the transducer factors are compatible with the current measurement settings. For more information on which conditions a transducer line must fulfill to be compati- ble, see chapter 9.2, "Basics on Transducer Factors",...
Page 574 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings Delete Line Delete the selected transducer line. Remote command: on page 1026 [SENSe: ] CORRection: T RANsducer: D ELete 9.3.2.2 Transducer Factors The settings and functions available for individual transducer lines are described here. For instructions on creating and editing transducer lines see chapter 9.6.6, "How to Configure the...
Page 575 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings Comment Defines an optional comment for the transducer line. The text may contain up to 40 characters. Remote command: on page 1026 [SENSe: ] CORRection: T RANsducer: C OMMent Unit The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the transducer line are defined. As soon as a transducer is activated, the unit of the transducer is automatically used for all the level settings and outputs.
Page 576: Alignment Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings Save Saves the currently edited transducer line under the name defined in the "Name" field. Remote command: on page 999 MMEMory: S ELect[: I TEM]: T RANsducer: A LL on page 1003 MMEMory:...
Page 577: System Configuration Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings A running Sequencer operation is aborted when you start a self-alignment. Remote command: on page 678, see also on page 1022 *CAL? CALibration[: A LL]? Aborting the Self-alignment As long as the self-alignment data is being collected the procedure can be cancelled using the "Abort Self-alignment"...
Page 578 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings Remote command: on page 1039 DIAGnostic: S ERVice: H WINfo? 9.3.4.2 Information on Versions and Options Information on the firmware version and options installed on your instrument is provi- ded in the "Versions Options" tab of the "System Configuration" dialog box. The unique R&S device ID is also indicated here, as it is required for license and option administra- tion.
Page 579 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings For details on options refer to the "Getting Started" manual, "Checking the Supplied Items". Remote commands: on page 1041 SYSTem: F ORMat: I DENt on page 1039 DIAGnostic: S ERVice: B IOSinfo? Install Option.......................
Page 580 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, "Message buffer overflow" is displayed. To clear the message buffer use the "Clear All Mes- sages" button. The following information is available: device-specific error code Message brief description of the message...
Page 581 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings Before updating the firmware on your instrument, read the release notes delivered with the firmware version. As of firmware version 1.60, administrator rights are no longer required to perform a firmware update. Installing options in secure user mode Be sure to perform any firmware updates before Secure User Mode...
Page 582 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings Preset Mode........................582 Out-of-range value behavior..................582 Secure User Mode...................... 582 └ Changing the password................583 Preset Mode The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, however, the pre- setting can be changed. The defined operating mode is activated when you switch on the R&S FSW or press the PRESET key.
Page 583: Service Functions
® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings The Secure User Mode can only be activated or deactivated by a user with administra- tor rights. Note: Storing instrument settings permanently. Before you activate secure user mode, store any instrument settings that are required beyond the current session, such as predefined instrument settings, transducer files, or self-alignment data.
Page 584 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings The service functions are available in the "Service" dialog box which is displayed when you press the SETUP key and then select "Service". ● R&S Support Information..................584 ● Selftest Settings and Results................
Page 585 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings Save Device Footprint Creates an *.xml file with information on installed hardware, software, image and FPGA versions. The *.xml file is stored under C:\R_S\Instr\devicedata\xml\ on the instrument. It is also included in the service.zip file. 9.3.5.2 Selftest Settings and Results If the R&S FSW fails you can perform a self test of the instrument to identify any defec-...
Page 586 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings 9.3.5.3 Calibration Signal Display Alternatively to the RF input signal from the front panel connector you can use the instrument's calibration signal as the input signal, for example to perform service func- tions on.
Page 587 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings Calibration Frequency RF Uses the internal calibration signal as the RF input signal. Remote command: on page 1024 DIAGnostic: S ERVice: I NPut[: S ELect] on page 1023 DIAGnostic: S ERVice: I NPut: P ULSed: C FRequency Spectrum ←...
Page 588 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings 9.3.5.4 Service Functions Using service functions The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation. Incorrect use can affect correct operation and/or data integrity of the R&S FSW. Therefore, only user accounts with administrator rights can use service functions and many of the functions can only be used after entering a password.
Page 589 ® General Instrument Setup R&S General Instrument Settings Numeric Mode If activated, the service function is selected by its numeric code. Otherwise, the func- tion is selected by its textual name. Send Starts the selected service function. Remote command: on page 1043 DIAGnostic:...
Page 590: Display Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Relay Cycle Counter....................590 Temperatures......................590 Ventilation........................590 Relay Cycle Counter The hardware relays built into the R&S FSW may fail after a large number of switching cycles (see data sheet). The counter indicates how many switching cycles the individ- ual relays have performed since they were installed.
Page 591: General Display Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings ● General Display Settings..................591 ● Displayed Items.....................592 ● Display Theme and Colors..................596 9.4.1 General Display Settings This section includes general screen display behavior and date and time display. These settings are available in the "General" tab of the "Display" dialog box. Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen.............
Page 592: Displayed Items
® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings "TOUCH DIAGRAM OFF" Touchscreen is deactivated for the diagram area of the screen, but active for the surrounding softkeys, toolbars and menus Remote command: on page 1030 DISPlay: T OUChscreen: S TATe Display Update Rate By default, a fast update rate ensures the most recent measurement results on the dis- play.
Page 593 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Toolbar........................593 Status Bar........................593 Softkey Bar........................594 Channel Bar........................ 594 Diagram Footer (Annotation)..................594 Date and Time......................594 Front Panel........................594 Mini Front Panel......................595 Toolbar The toolbar provides access to frequently used functions via icons at the top of the screen.
Page 594 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Softkey Bar Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provi- ded than those that can be accessed directly via the function keys on the device. The functions provided by the softkeys are often also available via dialog boxes. How- ever, some functions may not be accessible at all without the softkey bar.
Page 595 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings To activate or deactivate the front panel temporarily, press the F6 key on the external keyboard (if available) or the remote computer. For more information see chapter 9.6.8, "How to Work with the Soft Front Panels", on page 607.
Page 596: Display Theme And Colors
® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Note: You can also activate the Mini Front Panel using the key combination "ALT + m" (be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system!). This is useful when you are working from a remote PC and the Front Panel function is not active. Remote command: on page 1031 SYSTem:...
Page 597 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Theme......................... 597 Screen colors......................597 Print colors........................598 Showing Print Colors on Display.................598 Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments............... 598 └ Selecting the Object..................599 └ Predefined Colors..................599 └ Preview......................599 Defining User-specific Colors..................599 Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors............
Page 598 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Print colors Defines the color settings used for printout. In addition to the predefined settings, a user-defined color set can be configured. If "Show Print Colors on Display" is activated, the currently selected print colors are displayed as a preview for your selection.
Page 599 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Selecting the Object ← Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments Selects the object for which the color is to be defined. Colors can be defined for the following objects: ● Background ● Grid ● Individual traces ●...
Page 600: External Monitor Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S External Monitor Settings The color palette allows you to select the color directly. The color settings allow you to define values for tint, saturation and brightness. Remote command: on page 1006 HCOPy: C MAP<item>: H SL Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors In addition to the predefined color settings, a user-defined setting can be configured.
Page 601: How To Configure The Basic Instrument Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S How to Configure the Basic Instrument Settings External Monitor Off....................601 Duplicate........................601 Setup...........................601 External Monitor Off Only the internal monitor of the R&S FSW is used for display. Duplicate Both the internal and the external monitor are used. Setup User-defined configuration;...
Page 602: How To Perform A Self Test
® General Instrument Setup R&S How to Configure the Basic Instrument Settings 9.6.1 How to Perform a Self Test The self test does not need to be repeated every time the instrument is switched on. It is only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected. Operating temperature Before performing this functional test, make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet).
Page 603: How To Align The Touchscreen
® General Instrument Setup R&S How to Configure the Basic Instrument Settings 9.6.3 How to Align the Touchscreen To align the touchscreen 1. Press the SETUP key. 2. Select the "Alignment" softkey. 3. Select "Touchscreen Alignment". A blinking cross appears in the lower left corner of the screen. 4.
Page 604: How To Configure The Transducer
® General Instrument Setup R&S How to Configure the Basic Instrument Settings Note: Do not switch off the instrument during the reconfiguration process! Now the firmware update is complete. It is recommended that you perform a self- alignment after the update (see chapter 9.6.2, "How to Align the Instrument", on page 602).
Page 605 ® General Instrument Setup R&S How to Configure the Basic Instrument Settings 4. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button. The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep if the transducer line is active. How to copy an existing transducer line 1.
Page 606: How To Configure The Colors For Display And Printing
® General Instrument Setup R&S How to Configure the Basic Instrument Settings d) Repeat this to insert all other data points. To insert a data point before an existing one, select the data point and then "Insert Value". To insert a new data point at the end of the list, move the focus to the line after the last entry and then select "Insert Value".
Page 607: How To Work With The Soft Front Panels
® General Instrument Setup R&S How to Configure the Basic Instrument Settings To configure a user-defined color set 1. In the "Theme + Color" tab of the "Display" dialog box select "User Defined Colors" either for the screen or the print colors. 2.
Page 608 ® General Instrument Setup R&S How to Configure the Basic Instrument Settings By default, the "Auto close" option is activated and the Mini Front Panel window closes automatically after you select a key. This is useful if you only require the Mini Front Panel display occassionally to press a single function key.
Page 609: Network And Remote Operation
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 10 Network and Remote Operation In addition to working with the R&S FSW interactively, located directly at the instru- ment, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. Various methods for remote control are supported: ●...
Page 610 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 10-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Remarks Protocols, VISA address string ● HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol (IVI-6.1) Local Area A LAN connector is located on the TCPIP::host address::hislip0[::INSTR] Network rear panel of the instrument.
Page 611 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics VISA library Instrument access is usually achieved from high level programming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer. VISA encapsulates the low level VXI, GPIB, LAN or USB function calls and thus makes the transport interface transparent for the user.
Page 612 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics For details on configuring the LAN connection, see chapter 10.5.1, "How to Configure a Network", on page 658. VXI-11 Protocol The VXI-11 standard is based on the ONC RPC (Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call) protocol which in turn relies on TCP/IP as the network/transport layer.
Page 613 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Socket connections are established on a specially defined port. The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of the port configured for remote-control. All R&S FSW use port number 5025 for this pur- pose.
Page 614: Scpi (Standard Commands For Programmable Instruments)
Remote Control Basics Table 10-2: Product IDs for R&S FSW Instrument model Product ID FSW8 FSW13 FSW26 FSW43 FSW50 FSW67 Example: USB::0x0AAD::0x00C7::100001::INSTR 0x0AAD is the vendor ID for Rohde&Schwarz 0x00C7 is the product ID for the R&S FSW13 100001 is the serial number of the particular instrument 10.1.2 SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
Page 615: Messages
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 10.1.4 Messages The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories: ● Interface messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the attention line being active (LOW).
Page 616: Scpi Command Structure
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 10.1.5 SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more param- eters. The header and the parameters are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g.
Page 617 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 10.1.5.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument. For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for this section: ●...
Page 618 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Example: Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>] Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2. Different numbering in remote control For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec- tion used in manual operation.
Page 619 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used. Example: Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation Mnemonics...
Page 620 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Numeric values Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The man- tissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value range -32000 to 32000.
Page 621 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses. ● Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a instru- ment response.
Page 622 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Example: HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" or HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1' Block data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. A command using a block data parameter has the following structure: Example: FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character # introduces the data block.
Page 623 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● a <New Line> ● a <New Line> with EOI ● an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
Page 624: Command Sequence And Synchronization
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● Numeric values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command. The response 3.5E9 in the previous example stands for 3.5 GHz. ●...
Page 625 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages. Example: Overlapping command with *OPC The instrument implements INITiate[:IMMediate] as an overlapped command. Assuming that INITiate[:IMMediate] takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending the following command sequence results in initiating a sweep and, after some time, setting the OPC bit in the ESR: INIT;...
Page 626 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 2. Set bit no. 5 in the SRE: *SRE 32 to enable ESB service request. 3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC 4. Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished. *OPC? with a service request 1.
Page 627: Status Reporting System
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 10.1.7 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue.
Page 628 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics & logic AND not used not used not used not used of all bits logic OR one register for each channel Range completed Multi-Standard Capture Finish HCOPy in progress CACLR FAIL LMARgin 8 FAIL LIMit 8 FAIL ALT3...11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL...
Page 629 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● IST, PPE The IST flag ("Individual STatus"), like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status in a single bit. The PPE fulfills the same function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request.
Page 630 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affected by reading. ● PTRansition / NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.
Page 631 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register The STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register is used for digital I/Q data from the optional Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17) and is described in the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual. STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register The STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register is used by the R&S FSW applications and is described in the individual sections (manuals) for each application.
Page 632 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 10-4: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No. Meaning 0...1 Not used Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a service request.
Page 633 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 10-5: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No. Meaning Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.
Page 634 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Bit No. Meaning MEASuring Measurement is being performed in base unit (applications are not considered); identical to bit 3 In applications, this bit is not used. Waiting for TRIgger Instrument is ready to trigger and waiting for trigger signal. Not used HardCOPy in progress This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.
Page 635 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 10-7: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register Bit No. Meaning 0 - 1 Unused TIMe This bit is set if a time error occurs in any of the active channels. STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe Register provides more information on the error type.
Page 636 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register contains information about the results of a limit check during ACLR measurements. A separate ACPLimit register exists for each active channel. You can read out the register withSTATus:...
Page 637 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 10-9: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register Bit No. Meaning not used INFO This bit is set if a status message is available for the application. Which type of message occurred is indicated in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO Register.
Page 638 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics You can read out the register with STATus: Q UEStionable: F REQuency: CONDition? STATus: Q UEStionable: F REQuency[: E VENt]? Table 10-11: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register Bit No.
Page 639 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Bit No. Meaning LIMit 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated. 8 to 14 Unused This bit is always 0. STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register This register contains information about the observance of limit margins. A separate LMARgin register exists for each active channel and for each window.
Page 640 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 10-14: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register Bit No. Meaning OVERload This bit is set if an overload occurs at the RF input, causing signal distortion but not yet causing damage to the device.
Page 641 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics You can read out the register with STATus: Q UEStionable: T IME: C ONDition? STATus: Q UEStionable: T IME[: E VENt]? Table 10-16: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register Bit No.
Page 642 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program should cause the instrument to initiate a service request if errors occur. The program should react appropriately to the service request. A detailed example for a service request routine can be found in chapter 11.15.2, "Ser- vice...
Page 643 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Decimal representation of a bit pattern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits, the SCPI registers 16 bits. The contents of a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number. To make this possible, each bit is assigned a weighted value.
Page 644: General Programming Recommendations
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Event Switching on supply DCL, *RST or STA- *CLS voltage SYS- Tus:PRE- Tem:PRE- Power-On-Status- (Device Clear Clear, Selected Device Effect Clear) Clear PPE Clear EVENt parts of the regis- ters Clear ENABle parts of all OPERation and QUEStionable registers;...
Page 645: Gpib Languages
® Network and Remote Operation R&S GPIB Languages Error queues The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller pro- gram as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status regis- ters.
Page 646 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S GPIB Languages Language Comment 8568B Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure. 8568B_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument 8591E Compatible to 8594E 8594E...
Page 647: The Iecwin Tool
® Network and Remote Operation R&S The IECWIN Tool Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling Points FSEB 0 Hz 7 GHz -20 dBm FSEM 0 Hz 26.5 GHz -20 dBm FSEK 0 Hz 40 GHz -20 dBm Note: The stop frequency indicated in the table may be limited to the corresponding frequency of the R&S FSW, if required.
Page 648: Network And Remote Control Settings
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Starting IECWIN IECWIN is available from the Windows task bar on the R&S FSW, or by executing the following file: C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<1.10 or higher>\ iecwin32.exe You can also copy the program to any Windows PC or laptop. Simply copy the iecwin32.exe, iecwin.chm and rsib32.dll files from the location above to the same folder on the target computer.
Page 649: General Network Settings
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings 10.4.1 General Network Settings The R&S FSW can be operated in a local area network (LAN), for example to control the instrument from a remote PC or use a network printer. The general network settings are defined in the "Network"...
Page 650: Gpib Settings
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains 3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are allowed in a block (as an example see the preinstalled address). Subnet Mask Defines the subnet mask.
Page 651 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Remote Display Update....................651 GPIB Terminator......................651 *IDN Format........................ 651 Logging........................652 GPIB Address Defines the GPIB address. Values from 0 to 30 are allowed. The default address is 20. Remote command: on page 1035 SYSTem:...
Page 652: Compatibility Settings
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings "New" R&S FSW format Remote command: on page 1041 SYSTem: F ORMat: I DENt I/O Logging Activates or deactivates the SCPI error log function. All remote control commands received by the R&S FSW are recorded in the following log file: C:\R_S\instr\ScpiLogging\ScpiLog.txt Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes, e.g.
Page 653 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Language........................653 Gain........................654 Sweep Repeat......................654 Coupling........................654 Wideband........................654 FSU/FSQ Preamplifier....................655 Revision String......................655 Resetting the Factory Revision................... 655 Language Defines the system language used to control the instrument. For details on the available GPIB languages, see chapter 11.13.2, "Reference: GPIB Commands of Emulated HP...
Page 654 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Note: For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the *OPT? query ("B7J, 140" or "B7J, 122" if Wideband is activated, see SYSTem: P SA: W IDeband on page 1051).
Page 655: Lxi Settings
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings "Off" No wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J". "40 MHz" The 40 MHz wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J, 140". "80 MHz" The 80 MHz wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J, 122".
Page 656 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Current LXI Configuration................... 656 Password......................656 LXI Manufacturer Description..................657 Reset........................657 Current LXI Configuration Displays the current LXI information from the R&S FSW (read-only). "Current ver- Current LXI version sion" "LXI Extended Detected LXI features, such as HiSlip (see "HiSLIP Protocol"...
Page 657: How To Set Up A Network And Remote Control
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control LXI Manufacturer Description Instrument description of the R&S FSW Remote command: on page 1037 SYSTem: L XI: M DEScription LAN Reset Resets the LAN configuration to its default settings (LCI function). According to the LXI standard, an LCI must set the following parameters to a default state.
Page 658: How To Configure A Network
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control for use in production. The computer that is used for remote operation is called "control- ler" here. The following tasks can be performed using Remote Desktop: ●...
Page 659 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control If the instrument is connected to the LAN, Windows automatically detects the network connection and activates the required drivers. The network card can be operated with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802.3u interface. 10.5.1.2 How to Assign the IP Address Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instru-...
Page 660 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 5. Enter the "IP Address", for example 10.0.0.10. The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains 3 numbers in maximum. 6.
Page 661 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 8. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses" and enter your own DNS addresses. For more information refer to the Windows 7 operating system Help. 10.5.1.3 How to Change the Instrument Name In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instru-...
Page 662 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The instrument home page displays the device information required by the LXI stand- ard including the VISA resource string in read-only format. ► Press the "Device Indicator" button on the "Instrument Home Page" to activate or deactivate the LXI status icon on the status bar of the R&S FSW.
Page 663 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control IP Configuration The "LAN Configuration > IP configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows their modification. The "TCP/IP Mode" configuration field controls how the IP address for the instrument gets assigned (see also chapter 10.5.1.2, "How to Assign the IP Address",...
Page 664: How To Operate The Instrument Without A Network
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 10.5.1.5 How to Change the GPIB Instrument Address In order to operate the instrument via remote control, it must be addressed using the GPIB address. The remote control address is factory-set to 20, but it can be changed if it does not fit in the network environment.
Page 665 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 10.5.3.1 How to Create Users After the software for the network has been installed, the instrument issues an error message the next time it is switched on because there is no user named "instrument" (= default user ID for Windows automatic login) in the network.
Page 666: How To Share Directories (Only With Microsoft Networks)
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 10.5.3.3 How to Activate or Deactivate the Automatic Login Mechanism Deactivating the automatic login mechanism When shipped, the instrument is already configured to automatically log on under Win- dows 7.
Page 667: How To Set Up Remote Desktop
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 4. Select a user from the list or add a new name and select the "Add" button. 5. Select the "Share" button. 6. Select "Done" to close the dialog box. The drive is shared and can be accessed by the selected users.
Page 668 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address is assigned each time the instru- ment is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument itself. Thus, using a DHCP server is not suitable for remote operation of the R&S FSW via Remote Desktop.
Page 669 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Remote Desktop", on page 667. Furthermore, you can add or remove users to this group at any time. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system. 2.
Page 670 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control c) As the level of access you want to allow the new user, select "Other", then select "Remote Desktop Users" from the dropdown list. d) Select the "Finish" button. The user is created.
Page 671 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 1. In the "Start" menu of the controller, select "All Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop Connection". The "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box is displayed. 2.
Page 672 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 10. Under "Remote desktop size", you can set the size of the R&S FSW window on the desktop of the controller. 11. Under "Colors", do not change the settings. 12.
Page 673 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control ● Press the key combination ALT + F4. ● The R&S FSW firmware is shut down, which may take a few sec- onds. ● On the desktop, double-tap the "Analyzer" icon. The firmware restarts and then automatically opens the "Soft Front Panel", i.e.
Page 674: How To Start A Remote Control Session From A Pc
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The connection to the controller is terminated as a result. A message is displayed on the controller display indicating that another user has assumed control of the instrument.
Page 675: How To Return To Manual Operation
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 4. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, disable the keys of the instru- ment using the universal command LLO. Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then. This function is only available for the GPIB interface.
Page 676: Remote Commands
® Remote Commands R&S Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions 11 Remote Commands The commands required to perform measurements in the Spectrum application in a remote environment are described here. It is assumed that the R&S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a net- work as described in chapter 10.5, "How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control",...
Page 677: Common Suffixes
® Remote Commands R&S Common Suffixes Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values. ● Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con- firmed. All commands used by the R&S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules. ●...
Page 678 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands ...........................678 *CAL? ..........................678 *CLS ..........................678 *ESE ...........................678 *ESR? ..........................679 *IDN? ..........................679 *IST? ..........................679 *OPC ...........................679 *OPT? ..........................680 *PCB ..........................680 *PRE ..........................680 *PSC ..........................681 *RST ..........................681 *SRE ...........................681 *STB? ..........................
Page 679 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently sets the register to zero. Return values: <Contents> Range: 0 to 255 Usage: Query only *IDN? Identification Returns the instrument identification. Return values: <ID>...
Page 680 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands Return values: <Options> The query returns a list of all installed and activated options, separated by commas, where: B<number> describes hardware options K<number> describes software options For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the *OPT? query ("B7J, 140"...
Page 681 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands *RST Reset Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the description of commands. The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet. Note that the factory set default values can be modified to user-defined settings (see on page 1001).
Page 682: Selecting The Operating Mode And Application
® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Triggers selftests of the instrument and returns an error code in decimal form (see Ser- vice Manual supplied with the instrument). "0" indicates no errors occured. Usage: Query only *WAI Wait to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and...
Page 683 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Parameters: <State> ON | OFF The MultiView tab is displayed. The most recently displayed measurement channel is displayed. *RST: INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel, i.e starts a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set- tings.
Page 684 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Manual operation: "New Channel" on page 105 INSTrument:CREate:REPLace <ChannelName1>,<ChannelType>,<ChannelName2> This command replaces a measurement channel with another one. Parameters: <ChannelName1> String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace. <ChannelType>...
Page 685 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Usage: Query only Table 11-1: Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application <ChannelType> Parameter Default Channel Name*) Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum I/Q Analyzer IQ Analyzer PULSE Pulse...
Page 686 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application INSTrument:MODE <OpMode> The operating mode of the R&S FSW determines which applications are available and active. Whenever you change the operating mode, the currently active measurement channels are stored. The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, however, the presetting can be changed.
Page 687: Performing A Sequence Of Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Parameters: <ChannelType> Channel type of the new channel. For a list of available channel types see INSTrument: L IST? on page 684. <ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel. Example: INST SAN Activates a measurement channel for the Spectrum application.
Page 688 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements. The Sequencer itself is not deactivated, so you can start a new sequence immediately using on page 688. INITiate: S EQuencer: I MMediate To deactivate the Sequencer use on page 689.
Page 689 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Parameters: <Mode> SINGle Each measurement is performed once (regardless of the chan- nel's sweep mode), considering each channels' sweep count, until all measurements in all active channels have been per- formed.
Page 690: Programming Example: Performing A Sequence Of Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Example: SYST:SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer. INIT:SEQ:MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once. INIT:SEQ:IMM Starts the sequential measurements. SYST:SEQ OFF Manual operation: "Sequencer State" on page 108 11.4.3 Programming Example: Performing a Sequence of Measurements This example demonstrates how to perform several measurements in a sequence in a...
Page 691 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application DISP:TRAC2:MODE MINH //Create new analyzer channel INSTrument:CREate:NEW SANalyzer,'Spectrum 2' //Activate ACLR measurement in channel 'Spectrum 2' CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower //Load W-CDMA Standard CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet FW3Gppcdma //Change trace modes DISP:TRAC2:MODE MAXH DISP:TRAC1:MODE MINH //--------Performing a sweep and retrieving results---------------- //Change sweep count SENS:SWEep:COUNt 7...
Page 692: Configuring And Performing Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Query one of the SEM results CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CPOWer //Switch to second Spectrum channel INST:SEL 'Spectrum 2';*WAI //Query channel power result CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower 11.5 Configuring and Performing Measurements The following commands are required to configure measurements in a remote environ- ment.
Page 693 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure- ment has been aborted successfully, use the *OPC? or *WAI command after ABOR and before the next command. For details see chapter 10.1.6.1, "Preventing Overlapping Execution", on page 625.
Page 694 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging. SWE:COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps. INIT;*WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps. INIT:CONM;*WAI Continues the measurement (next 20 sweeps) and waits for the end.
Page 695: Configuring Power Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements With sweep count or average count > 0, this means a restart of the corresponding number of measurements. With trace mode MAXHold, MINHold and AVERage, the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement. You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI.
Page 696 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ................699 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ..............699 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel ....................699 [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:MODE <Mode> This command selects the trace display mode for power measurements. Parameters: <Mode> WRITe The power is calculated from the current trace. MAXHold The power is calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm.
Page 697 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Query parameters: <Measurement> ACPower | MCACpower ACLR measurements (also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements). Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel. The order is: •...
Page 698 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Ch Power ACLR" on page 112 "C/N, C/No" on page 112 "OBW" on page 113 "Spectrum Emission Mask" on page 113 "C/N" on page 186 "C/No" on page 186 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect <MeasType> This command selects a power measurement and turns the measurement on.
Page 699 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet <Measurement> This command determines the ideal span, bandwidths and detector for the current power measurement. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweeps.
Page 700: Measuring The Channel Power And Aclr
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Selected Trace" on page 153 11.5.3 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR All remote control commands specific to channel power or ACLR measurements are described here. See also chapter 11.5.2, "Configuring Power Measurements", on page 695.
Page 701 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Predefined Standards" on page 150 "User-Defined Standards" on page 150 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog? This command queries all files containing ACLR standards. Return values: <Standards> List of standard files. Usage: Query only Manual operation: "User-Defined Standards"...
Page 702 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ............704 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> ............704 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch> ..............704 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <ChannelPairs> This command defines the number of pairs of adjacent and alternate channels. Parameters: <ChannelPairs> Range: 0 to 12 *RST: Manual operation: "Number of Channels (Tx, ADJ)" on page 152 "Number of Adjacent Channels (ADJ Count)"...
Page 703 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements. Parameters: <Bandwidth> Range: 100 Hz to 1000 MHz *RST: 14 kHz Manual operation: "Channel Bandwidths" on page 156 "Channel Bandwidth" on page 187 "Channel Bandwidth"...
Page 704 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements A change of the adjacent channel spacing causes a change in the spacing of all alter- nate channels below the adjacent channel. Parameters: <Spacing> Range: 100 Hz to 2000 MHz *RST: 14 kHz Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation:...
Page 705 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Number> Range: 1 to 18 *RST: Manual operation: "Number of Channels (Tx, ADJ)" on page 152 11.5.3.3 Defining Weighting Filters The following commands define weighting filters for ACLR measurements............705 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel ...............705 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL]...
Page 706 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<ch> <Alpha> This command defines the roll-off factor for the transmission channel weighting filter. Parameters: <Alpha> Roll-off factor Range: 0 to 1 *RST: 0.22 Manual operation: "Weighting Filters" on page 158 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel <State> This command turns the weighting filter for the adjacent channel on and off.
Page 707 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 11.5.3.4 Selecting the Reference Channel The following commands define the reference channel for relative ACLR measure- ments............707 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE ..........707 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO ..........707 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE This command sets the channel power as the reference for relative ACLR measure- ments.
Page 708 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Reference Channel" on page 152 11.5.3.5 Checking Limits The following commands configure and query limit checks for channel power and ACLR measurements. The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL sta- tus registry (see "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register"...
Page 709 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Limit Checking" on page 157 "Limit Checking" on page 170 CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] <LowerLimit>, <UpperLimit> This command defines the relative limit of the adjacent channels. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power. If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Page 710 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate: L IMit: A CPower[: S TATe] Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Manual operation: "Limit Checking" on page 157 "Limit Checking"...
Page 711 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <LowerLimit>, The first value defines the limit of the lower alternate channel, <UpperLimit> the second value the limit of the upper alternate channel. Range: 0 dB to 100 dB *RST: 0 DB Default unit: dB Manual operation: "Limit Checking"...
Page 712 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements In addition, limits must be defined and activated individually for each channel (see CALCulate: L IMit: A CPower: A CHannel[: R ELative]: S TATe CALCulate: LIMit: A CPower: A LTernate<ch>[: R ELative]: S TATe CALCulate:...
Page 713 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 11.5.3.7 Configuring MSR ACLR Measurements If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected (see CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: on page 700), the channels for the ACLR measurement FUNCtion: P OWer: P RESet are configured differently. (For more information see chapter 5.3.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals",...
Page 714 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check. Suffix: <gap> 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number Parameters: <Limit>...
Page 715 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate:LIMit:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:RELative:]STATe <State> This command turns the relative limit check for the specified gap (CACLR) channel on and off. You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate:...
Page 716 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:GAP<gap> <Bandwidth> This command defines the bandwidth of the specified MSR gap (CACLR) channel. This command is for MSR signals only (see CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: on page 700). FUNCtion: P OWer: P RESet Suffix: <gap>...
Page 717 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <gap> 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Manual operation: "Weighting Filters" on page 171 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:STATe:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch> <State> This command turns the weighting filter for the specified transmission channel on and off.
Page 718 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Tx Channel Bandwidth" on page 167 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:CENTer[:CHANnel<ch>] <Frequency> This command defines the (absolute) center frequency of the specified MSR Tx chan- nel. Note that the position of the first Tx channel in the first sub block and the last Tx chan- nel in the last sub block also affect the position of the adjacent channels.
Page 719 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Name> String containing the name of the channel Example: POW:ACH:SBL2:NAME:CHAN2? Result: 'B:WCDMA' Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Tx Channel Definition" on page 166 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:RFBWidth <Bandwidth> This command defines the bandwidth of the individual MSR sub block. Note that sub block ranges also affect the position of the adjacent gap channels (CACLR).
Page 720 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Standard> GSM | WCDMa | LTE_1_40 | LTE_3_00 | LTE_5_00 | LTE_10_00 | LTE_15_00 | LTE_20_00 | USER Technology used for transmission Transmission according to GSM standard WCDMa Transmission according to W-CDMA standard LTE_1_40 | LTE_3_00 | LTE_5_00 | LTE_10_00 | LTE_15_00 | LTE_20_00 Transmission according to LTE standard for different channel...
Page 721 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <gap> 1 | 2 Gap channel number Parameters: <Spacing> numeric value in Hz *RST: 2.5 MHz Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Gap (CACLR) Channel Spacings" on page 171 11.5.3.8 Performing an ACLR Measurement The following commands are required to perform an ACLR measurement: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP, see CALCulate<n>:...
Page 722 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES:PHZ ON Output of results referred to the channel bandwidth. Manual operation: "Channel Power Levels and Density (Power Unit)" on page 154 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE <Mode> This command selects the way the R&S FSW displays the power of adjacent channels. You need at least one adjacent channel for the command to work.
Page 723 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements POW:ACH:NAME:CHAN1 'TX Channel' //Names the first transmission channel 'TX Channel'. POW:ACH:ACP 2 //Creates two adjacent channels - one adjacent channel and one alternate channel. POW:ACH:NAME:ACH 'ABC' //Names the adjacent channel 'ABC' POW:ACH:NAME:ALT1 'XYZ' //Names the first alternate channel 'XYZ'.
Page 724 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //---------------Working with Limits------------ CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB,30DB //Defines a relative limit of 30 dB below the power of the reference channel //for both adjacent channels. CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1 25DB,25DB //Defines a relative limit of 25 dB below the power of the reference channel //for the first alternate channels.
Page 725 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements :SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 1.25GHz :SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN 62.0MHz :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBCount 3 //----------------- Configuring Sub block A :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TXCHannel:COUNt 3 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:FREQuency:CENTer 1.230GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:RFBWidth 12MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.226GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel2 1.230GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel3 1.234GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel1 WCDMA :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel2 WCDMA :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel3 GSM :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 2.5MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel2 2.5MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel3 2.5MHZ //----------------- Configuring Sub block B :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:TXCHannel:COUNt 1...
Page 726: Measuring The Carrier-To-Noise Ratio
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel 1.60MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate1 1.60MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 3MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate1 5MHZ //----------------- Configuring gap (CACLR) channels :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP1 2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP2 5.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP1 2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP2 2.0MHZ //--------------Performing the Measurement----- //Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI //---------------Retrieving Results------------- //Return the results for the ACLR measurement.
Page 727: Measuring The Occupied Bandwidth
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● [SENSe: ] POWer: A CHannel: B ANDwidth|BWIDth[: C HANnel<ch>] ● [SENSe: ] POWer: A CHannel: P RESet Programming example: Measuring the carrier-to-noise ratio This programming example demonstrates how to perform a Carrier-to-noise measure- ment in a remote environment.
Page 728 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Useful commands for occupied bandwidth measurements described elsewhere Configuring the channel: ● [SENSe: ] POWer: A CHannel: B ANDwidth|BWIDth[: C HANnel<ch>] ● [SENSe: ] POWer: A CHannel: P RESet ● [SENSe: ] POWer: A CHannel: P RESet: R LEVel Defining search limits: ●...
Page 729: Measuring The Spectrum Emission Mask
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW //Activates occupied bandwidth measurement. POW:BWID 99PCT //Sets the percentage of power to 99%. POW:ACH:BAND 21kHz //Sets the channel bandwidth to 21 kHz. POW:ACH:PRES OBW //Optimizes the instrument settings according to the channel bandwidth. POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV //Determines the ideal reference level for the measurement.
Page 730 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ................730 CALCulate:LIMit:ESPectrum:RESTore ..............730 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet[:STANdard] ..............730 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:RESTore ............... 731 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe CALCulate:LIMit:ESPectrum:RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines for the selected Spectrum Emission Mask standard. All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the factory-set values are restored.
Page 731 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe <Standard> This command saves the current SEM measurement configuration. Standard definitions are stored in an xml file. The default directory for SEM standards is C:\r_s\instr\sem_std. Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Standard>...
Page 732 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 11.5.6.3 Configuring a Multi-SEM Measurement As of firmware version 1.91, and in the Spectrum application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple s ub blocks of channels (see chapter 5.6.4.5, "SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("Multi-SEM")", on page 205).
Page 733 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on-going sweep operation. See also: ● CALCulate: L IMit: E SPectrum<sb>: P CLass<class>: L IMit[: S TATe] on page 752 ................733 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:HighSPeed ........734 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution]...
Page 734 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: ESP:HSP ON Manual operation: "Fast SEM" on page 211 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <RBW> This command defines the resolution bandwidth for a SEM range. In case of high speed measurements, the resolution bandwidth has to be identical for all ranges.
Page 735 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Return values: <Ranges> Number of ranges in the sweep list. Usage: Query only [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:DELete This command removes a range from the sweep list. Note that ●...
Page 736 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <FilterType> NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC filters CISPr | PULSe CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option Return value for query is always PULS. MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option 5 Pole filters *RST: NORM...
Page 737 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP <Frequency> This command defines the stop frequency of a SEM range. Make sure to set an appropriate span. If you set a span that is ● smaller than the span the SEM sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span - results may be invalid.
Page 738 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State> This command turns automatic selection of the input attenuation for a SEM range on and off. In case of high speed measurements, the input attenuation has to be identical for all ranges.
Page 739 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <range> 1..30 Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Manual operation: "Preamp" on page 212 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:INSert <Mode> This command inserts a new SEM range and updates the range numbers accordingly.
Page 740 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Level> Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range. Range: -400 to 400 *RST: Default unit: dBm Example: SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt -10 For a detailed example see chapter 11.5.6.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 762.
Page 741 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <range> 1..30 Selects the SEM range. <PClass> 1..4 Power class for which the limit is defined. Parameters: <Level> Relative limit at the start frequency of a SEM range. Range: -400 to 400 *RST: Default unit: dBc Example:...
Page 742 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:LIMit<PClass>:RELative:STARt: FUNCtion <Function> This command enables the use of a function when defining the relative limit for a SEM range. Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <range>...
Page 743 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <PClass> 1..4 Power class for which the limit is defined. Parameters: <Level> Relative limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range. Range: -400 to 400 *RST: Default unit: dBc Example: SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:RELative:STOP -15 For a detailed example see chapter 11.5.6.11, "Example: SEM Measurement",...
Page 744 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:LIMit<PClass>:RELative:STOP: FUNCtion <Function> This command enables the use of a function when defining the relative limit for a SEM range. Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <range>...
Page 745 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <State> ABSolute | RELative | AND | OR ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined. RELative Checks only the relative limits. Relative limits are defined as rel- ative to the measured power in the reference range. Combines the absolute and relative limit.
Page 746 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Function> NONE (reference ranges only:) the limit of the reference range is used; Reference ranges always use the function "NONE". sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used maximum of the two limit lines is used *RST: SUM (reference range: NONE)
Page 747 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State> This command turns automatic selection of the sweep time for a SEM range on and off. In case of high speed measurements, the sweep time has to be identical for all ranges. Suffix: <sb>...
Page 748 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:BWID <Bandwidth> This command defines the channel bandwidth of the reference range. The bandwidth is available if the power reference is the channel power. Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Bandwidth>...
Page 749 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values: <RefRange> Number of the current reference range. Range: 1 to 30 Usage: Query only [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe <Type> This command defines the type of the power reference. Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Type>...
Page 750 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Setting parameters: <Max1> Defines the value range for power class 1 as -200 to <Max1>. Only available for CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUNT >=2 If only 2 power classes are defined, the value range for power class 2 is defined as <Max1>...
Page 751 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Mode> AUTO The power class (and thus the limit line) is assigned dynamically according to the currently measured channel power. MANUAL One of the specified power classes is selected manually for the entire measurement.
Page 752 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <NoPowerClasses> 1 to 4 *RST: Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined. Manual operation: "Adding or Removing a Power Class" on page 219 CALCulate:LIMit:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<class>[:EXCLusive] <State> This command selects the power class used by the measurement if CALCulate:...
Page 753 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <State> ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values. A negative result is returned if both limits fail. Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values.
Page 754 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● The lower limit of a power class must always be the same as the upper limit of the previous power class. ● The power class must already exist (see CALCulate: L IMit: E SPectrum<sb>: on page 751).
Page 755 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: //Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT BC1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to > 3 GHz ESP2:MSR:BAND:HIGH //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ...
Page 756 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Category> 1 | 2 | 3 2 carriers: LTE FDD and W-CDMA 3 carriers: LTE FDD, W-CDMA and GSM/EDGE 2 carriers: LTE TDD and TD-SCDMA *RST: Example:...
Page 757 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: //Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT BC1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to > 3 GHz ESP2:MSR:BAND:HIGH //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ...
Page 758 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CPResent <State> This command defines whether a GSM/Edge carrier is located at the edge of the speci- fied RF bandwidth. In this case, the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges. This command is only available for band category 2 (see [SENSe:...
Page 759 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: //Select the band category 2 ESP2:MSR:BCAT BC2 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //LTE present ESP2:MSR:LTE:CPR...
Page 760 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Bandwidth> Bandwidth in Hz *RST: 10.0 MHz Example: //Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT BC1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to >...
Page 761 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Usage: Event CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|PEAKsearch:MARGin <Threshold> This command defines the threshold of the list evaluation. Parameters: <Margin> Range: -200 to 200 *RST: Default unit: dB Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB. Manual operation: "Margin"...
Page 762 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● on page 924 TRACe<n>[: D ATA]: X ? 11.5.6.11 Example: SEM Measurement In this example we will configure and perform an SEM measurement. Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands, it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task.
Page 763 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL2:LIM REL //Defines a relative limit check for class 2. CALC:LIM:ESP:MODE MAN //Defines a manual selection of the power class. CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL2 ON //Activates the use of the second power class for the entire measurement. //------------ Configuring a Sweep List--------------------- ESP:RANG2:INS AFT //Inserts a range after range 2.
Page 764 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ESP:RANG2:TRAN 'Transducer' //Includes a transducer called 'transducer' for range 2. //------------ Configuring the limit check------------------ ESP:RANG:LIM1:STAT AND //Checks the absolute and relative limits for all ranges in power class 1 and //fails if both limits are violated. Since power class 2 is set to be used for //the entire measurement, values for Limit Check 1 are irrelevant.
Page 765: Measuring Spurious Emissions
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:LIM:FAIL? //Queries the result of the limit check for all ranges. TRAC:DATA? LIST //Returns the peak for each range of the SEM measurement as a list. 11.5.7 Measuring Spurious Emissions All remote control commands specific to spurious emissions measurements are descri- bed here.
Page 766 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ................. 767 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DETector ..............768 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE ............769 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt ............769 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP ............770 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation ..........770 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO ............770 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe ............770 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN[:VALue] ..............771 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STARt ................. 771 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe:LIMit:STATe ..............771 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP ..............772 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:POINts[:VALue] ................772 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:RLEVel ..............
Page 767 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe:BREak <State> This command controls the sweep. Parameters: <State> The R&S FSW stops after measuring one range. To continue with the next range, you have to use INITiate: CONMeas The R&S FSW sweeps all ranges in one go. *RST: Manual operation: "Stop After Sweep"...
Page 768 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Detector> NEGative minimum peak detector POSitive peak detector SAMPle sample detector RMS detector AVERage average detector *RST: Manual operation: "Detector" on page 244 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE <FilterType> This command selects the filter type for a spurious emission measurement range. The EMI-specific filter types are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed, even if EMI measurement is not active.
Page 769 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt <Frequency> This command defines the start frequency of a spurious emission measurement range. Make sure to set an appropriate span. If you set a span that is ● smaller than the span the sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span - results may be invalid.
Page 770 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation <Attenuation> This command defines the input attenuation for a spurious emission measurement range. Suffix: <range> 1..30 Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <Attenuation> Numeric value. Refer to the data sheet for the attenuation range. *RST: 10 dB Default unit: dB...
Page 771 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements The command requires option R&S FSW-B24. Suffix: <range> 1..30 Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <Gain> 15 dB | 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R&S FSW model. • R&S FSW8/13: 15dB and 30 dB •...
Page 772 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Level> Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range. Range: -400 to 400 *RST: Default unit: dBm Manual operation: "Abs Limit Start/Stop" on page 246 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:POINts[:VALue] <Points> This command defines the number of sweep points in a spurious emission measure- ment range.
Page 773 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <SweepTime> Sweep time. The range depends on the ratios of the span to the RBW and the RBW to the VBW. Refer to the data sheet for more informa- tion. Manual operation: "Sweep Time"...
Page 774 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Remote commands exclusive to spurious emission measurements ..............774 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch|PEAKsearch:AUTO ..............774 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch|PEAKsearch:MARGin ..............774 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch|PEAKsearch:PSHow ............774 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch|PEAKsearch:SUBRanges CALCulate<n>:PSEarch|PEAKsearch:AUTO <State> This command turns the list evaluation on and off. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 *RST: Example:...
Page 775 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: CALC:PSE:SUBR 10 Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list. Manual operation: "Peaks per Range" on page 248 11.5.7.4 Performing a Spurious Measurement The following commands are required to perform a Spurious measurement: SENS:SWE:MODE LIST, see on page 731 [SENSe:...
Page 776 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control com- mands, it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task. //------------Preparing the measurement------------- *RST //Resets the instrument SWE:MODE LIST //Activates spurious emissions measurement INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode.
Page 777 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Deletes the fourth range. LIST:RANG1:STAR 10000000 //Defines a start frequency of 10 MHz for range 1. LIST:RANG1:STOP 100000000 //Defines a stop frequency of 100 MHz for range 1. LIST:RANG1:BAND 500000 //Defines a resolution bandwidth of 500 kHz in range 1. LIST:RANG1:BAND:VID 5000000 //Defines a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 1.
Page 778: Analyzing Statistics (Apd, Ccdf)
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:PSE:SUBR 10 //Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list. //--------------Performing the Measurement----- INIT:SPUR; *WAI //Performs a spurious emission measurement and waits until the sweep has finished. //---------------Retrieving Results------------- CALC:LIM1:FAIL? //Queries the result of the check for limit line 1.
Page 779 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:STAT:CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement. Manual operation: "CCDF" on page 114 11.5.8.2 Configuring Statistical Measurements The following commands configure the measurement. Useful commands for configuring statistical measurements described elsewhere: ●...
Page 780 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 11.5.8.3 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements The following commands control gated statistical measurements..............780 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:COMMent ................. 780 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe:PERiod ............780 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:STARt<range> ............781 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>[:STATe<range>] ............781 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:STOP<range> [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>:COMMent <Comment> This command defines a comment for the gate of a particular trace. Parameters: <Comment>...
Page 781 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Time> The value range depends on the gate period you have set for the selected trace with [SENSe: ] SWEep: E GATe: T RACe: . The following rules apply: PERiod • the start time may not be higher than the length of the gate •...
Page 782 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Time> The value range depends on the gate period you have set for the selected trace with [SENSe: ] SWEep: E GATe: T RACe: . The following rules apply: PERiod • the stop time may not be higher than the length of the gate •...
Page 783 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE This command initiates an automatic scaling of the diagram (x- and y-axis). To obtain maximum resolution, the level range is set as a function of the measured spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement.
Page 784 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer <Magnitude> This command defines the lower vertical limit of the diagram. Parameters: <Magnitude> The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless. Range: 1E-9 to 0.1 *RST: 1E-6 Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:LOW 0.001 Manual operation: "Y-Max / Y-Min"...
Page 785 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Remote commands exclusive to statistical results ................785 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<t>? ...................785 CALCulate:STATistics:RESult<t>? CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<t>? <Probability> This command queries the results of the CCDF. Query parameters: <Probability> P0_01 Level value for 0.01 % probability P0_1 Level value for 0.1 % probability P1: Level value for 1 % probability Level value for 10 % probability...
Page 786 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "APD" on page 113 "CCDF" on page 114 11.5.8.7 Programming Example: Measuring Statistics This example demonstrates how to determine statistical values for a measurement in a remote environment using the gated statistics example described in chapter 5.8.4, "APD and CCDF Basics - Gated Triggering",...
Page 787: Measuring The Time Domain Power
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Activates the use of range 1. //--------------Performing the Measurement----- INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode. INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished. //---------------Retrieving Results------------- CALC:STAT:RES1? MEAN //Returns the mean average power for the useful part of the GSM signal. //------------- Determining the CCDF values------------------- CALC:STAT:CCDF ON //Activates CCDF measurement.
Page 788 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 11.5.9.1 Configuring the Measurement The following remote commands measure the time domain power. Useful commands for time domain power measurements described elsewhere ● CALCulate: M ARKer: X : S LIMits: L EFT ●...
Page 789 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON Switches on the calculation of average. AVER:COUN 200 Sets the measurement counter to 200. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd <State>...
Page 790 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] <State> This command turns the evaluation to determine the positive peak time domain power on and off. The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on. Parameters: <State>...
Page 791 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Measuring the Mean Power .......791 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult? ......791 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult? ........791 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult? This command queries the average mean time domain power. The query is only possi- ble if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:...
Page 792 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Measuring the Peak Power CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult? This command queries the average positive peak time domain power. The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>: on page 788. MARKer<m>: F UNCtion: S UMMary: A VERage To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 793 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweeps. See also on page 694.
Page 794 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:PHOLd:RESult? This command queries the maximum standard deviation of the time domain power. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>: F UNCtion: S UMMary: P HOLd To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 795: Measuring The Harmonic Distortion
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Sets the instrument to zero span. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:STAT ON //Turns on time domain power measurements. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS ON //Turns the evalution of the mean, peak and RMS time domain power. CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON //Activates limit lines for evaluation.
Page 796 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] <State> This command turns the harmonic distortion measurement on and off. Note the following: ● If you perform the measurement in the frequency domain, the search range for the frequency of the first harmonic, whose power is determined, is defined by the last span.
Page 797 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics <NoHarmonics> This command selects the number of harmonics that the R&S FSW looks for. Parameters: <NoHarmonics> Range: 1 to 26 *RST: Manual operation: "No. of Harmonics" on page 274 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet This command initiates a measurement to determine the ideal configuration for the har- monic distortion measurement.
Page 798 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Harmonic Distortion" on page 114 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST? This command queries the position of the harmonics. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 799: Measuring The Third Order Intercept Point
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:DIST? TOT //Queries the total harmonic distortion. 11.5.11 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point ● Determining the TOI....................799 ● Programming Example: Measuring the TOI............800 11.5.11.1 Determining the TOI All remote control commands specific to TOI measurements are described here. Useful commands for TOI measurements described elsewhere ●...
Page 800 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE This command initiates a search for signals in the current trace to determine the third intercept point. Parameters: ONCE Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:SEAR ONCE Executes the search for 2 signals and their intermodulation prod- uct at the currently available trace.
Page 801: Measuring The Am Modulation Depth
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:SEAR ONCE //Initiates a search for signals in the current trace. //---------------Retrieving Results------------- CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES? //Returns the TOI. 11.5.12 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth All remote control commands specific to AM modulation depth measurements are described here.
Page 802 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: ONCE Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:SEAR ONCE Executes the search of an AM modulated signal at the currently available trace. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Search Signals" on page 287 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? This command queries the results of the AM modulation depth measurement.. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 803: Remote Commands For Emi Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //If the results are not accurate, change the position of the //the temporary markers manually. //----Changing the position of the temp markers----- CALC:MARK:X 100MHZ //Positions the reference marker on 100 MHz. CALC:DELT2:X 5KHZ //Positions delta marker 2 and 3 at a distance of 5 kHz to the reference marker.
Page 804 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Useful commands for configuring EMI markers described elsewhere: ● on page 932 CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>[: S TATe] on page 930 CALCulate<n>: D ELTamarker<m>[: S TATe] ● on page 932 CALCulate<n>: M ARKer<m>[: S TATe] on page 930 CALCulate<n>:...
Page 805 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Detector> no final measurement is performed AVER average detector CISPR Average detector CRMS RMS Average detector maximum peak detector quasipeak detector *RST: Manual operation: "Final Test Detector" on page 301 11.5.13.3 Configuring the EMI Final Test The commands required to configure the EMI final test are described here.
Page 806 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Time> Range: min value to max value *RST: Default unit: seconds Manual operation: "Dwell Time" on page 303 11.5.13.4 Configuring EMI Limit Lines The commands required to define limit lines for EMI measurements are described in chapter 11.8.4, "Configuring Display and Limit Lines", on page 975.
Page 807 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements INPut:LISN:TYPE <LISNType> This command selects the type of network. Parameters: <LISNType> TWOPhase 2-Phase networks FOURphase 4-Phase networks ESH3z5 ESH2z5 ENV4200 ENV216 *RST: Example: INP:LISN:TYPE ESH3z5 Selects the ESH3z5 network. Manual operation: "LISN Type" on page 305 11.5.13.6 Retrieving EMI Results...
Page 808 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? <Result> This command queries the result of the EMI measurement at the marker position. Return values: <Result> Power level. The unit depends on the one you have currently set. Example: CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:RES? Queries the result of marker 1.
Page 809 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:DELTa? This command queries the vertical distance from the deltamarker position to the limit line. The unit is dB. If the deltamarker has been assigned to a different trace than the limit line, or if no limit ine is defined for the marker position, the command returns -200.
Page 810 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //----------- Configuring the measurement ------------ //Select EMI measurement CALC:MARK:FUNC:FME:STAT ON //Configure CISPR filter and RBW BAND:TYPE CISP BAND:RES 1MHz //Define the dwell time CALC:MARK:FUNC:FME:DWEL 1ms //Configure an auto peak search CALC:MARK:FUNC:FME:PEAK:AUTO ON //Configure a logarithmic frequency scaling DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG //Configure marker demodulation for marker 1...
Page 811: List Evaluations
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:LIM:CLE //----------- Performing the Measurement ------------ //Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI //------------ Retrieving Results ------------------- //Query the results for the EMI measurement //First marker frequency, then final test level CALC:MARK1:X? CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:RES?
Page 812 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Noise cancellation in list evaluations Nnoise cancellation is also available in zero span and thus also for list evaluations. "Noise cancellation" on page 153 for details. List evaluations allow for a different instrument setup for each frequency you want to measure.
Page 813 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult? This command queries the results of the list evaluation. This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way, using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measure- ment.
Page 814 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <ElAttenuation> Defines the electronic attenuation for a list entry. Range: 0 to 30 Increment: 1 Default unit: dB <FilterType> Selects the filter type for a list entry. For more information see [SENSe: ] BANDwidth|BWIDth[: R ESolution]: T YPE <RBW>...
Page 815 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <TriggerSource> EXTernal | EXT2 | EXT3 | IMMediate | IFPower | RFPower | VIDeo Selects a trigger source. For more information see Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements. <TriggerSlope> NEGative | POSitive Selects the trigger slop. <TriggerOffset>...
Page 816: Measuring The Pulse Power
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements LIST:POW 935.2MHZ,0,10,OFF,NORM,1MHZ,3MHZ,440us,0, 935.4MHZ,0,10,10,CFIL,30KHZ,100KHZ,440us,0, 935.6MHZ,0,10,20,CFIL,30KHZ,100KHZ,440us,0; *OPC //Defines a list with 3 entries and initiates the measurement with synchronization to the end. //Analyzer produces a service request //On service request: SENS:LIST:POW:RES? //Returns the results of the measurements, two for each frequency (peak and RMS power). -----Initiliazing the measurement and querying results simultaneously----- LIST:POW? 935.2MHZ,0,10,OFF,NORM,1MHZ,3MHZ,440us,0,...
Page 817 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements The Pulse Power measurement is incompatible to other measurement functions (e.g. marker functionality or statistics). If you use a command that controls those functions, the R&S FSW aborts the Pulse Power measurement. The R&S FSW also aborts the Pulse Power measurement if you end the remote ses- sion.
Page 818 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <TimeOffset> Defines a time offset to start the measurement at the first pulse of a trace. *RST: Default unit: s <MeasTime> Defines the measurement time. Default unit: s <PulsePeriod> Defines the pulse period <#OfPulses>...
Page 819 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values: <PulsePower> List of pulse powers. The number of values depends on the number of pulses you have been measuring. The unit is dBm. Usage: Query only [SENSe:]MPOWer:[:SEQuence] <Frequency>, <RBW>, <MeasTime>, <TriggerSource>, <TriggerLevel>, <TriggerOffset>, <Detector>, <#OfPulses>...
Page 820 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <Detector> Selects the detector and therefore the way the measurement is evaluated. MEAN Calculates the RMS pulse power. PEAK Calculates the peak pulse power. <#OfPulses> Defines the number of pulses included in the measurement. Range: 1 to 32001 Return values:...
Page 821: Configuring The Result Display
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display //Result example: -105.225059509,-105.656074524,-105.423065186,-104.374649048,-103.059822083,-101.29511261, -99.96534729,-99.7452468872,-99.6610794067,-100.327224731,-100.96686554,-101.450386047, -102.150642395,-103.240142822,-105.95476532,-110.583129883,-115.7760849,-126.279388428, -124.620399475,-116.97366333 11.6 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here. The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 7.1, "Result Display Configu- ration", on page 440.
Page 822: Working With Windows In The Display
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display Parameters: <Size> LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen. Other windows are still active in the background. SMALl Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size. If more than one measurement window was displayed originally, these are visible again.
Page 823 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display <Direction> LEFT | RIGHt | ABOVe | BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win- dow. <WindowType> text value Type of result display (evaluation method) you want to add. See the table below for available parameter values.
Page 824 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display Example: LAY:CAT? Result: '2',2,'1',1 Two windows are displayed, named '2' (at the top or left), and '1' (at the bottom or right). Usage: Query only LAYout:IDENtify[:WINDow]? <WindowName> This command queries the index of a particular display window. Note: to query the name of a particular window, use the LAYout:...
Page 825 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display LAYout:SPLitter <Index1>,<Index2>,<Position> This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win- dows on each side of the splitter. As opposed to the on page 821 command, the DISPlay[:...
Page 826 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display Example: LAY:SPL 1,4,70 Moves the splitter between window 1 ('Frequency Sweep') and 3 ('Marker Peak List') towards the top (70%) of the screen. The following commands have the exact same effect, as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically.
Page 827: Examples: Configuring The Result Display
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display Usage: Query only LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix <n> from the display. The result of this command is identical to the command. LAYout: R EMove[: W INDow] Usage: Event LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace <WindowType>...
Page 828 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display //--------------Resetting the instrument ----------- *RST //--------------- Adding new windows -------------------- //Add a Spectrogram window beneath the Frequency Sweep window LAY:ADD? '1',BEL,SGR //Result: window number: '2' //Add a Marker Table window to the right of the Frequency Sweep window LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH,MTAB //Result: window number: '3' //Add a Marker Peak List window to the right of the Spectrogram window...
Page 829 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display 11.6.3.2 Example 2: Replacing and Removing Windows Starting from the display configured in Example 1: Adding and Arranging Windows, we will remove and replace result displays to obtain the following configuration: 1 Frequency Sweep 4 Marker Table //-------------- Preparing the configuration from example 1 ----------- *RST...
Page 830: Setting Basic Measurement Parameters
® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 11.7 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters All commands that set measurement-independent parameters are described here. ● Defining the Frequency and Span.................830 ● Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings............836 ● Configuring the Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling)..........844 ●...
Page 831 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep This command matches the center frequency step size to the current marker fre- quency. The command turns delta markers into normal markers. Usage: Event DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe:X:SPACing <ScalingType> This command selects the scaling of the x-axis. Parameters: <ScalingType>...
Page 832 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize> This command defines the center frequency step size. You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS:FREQ UP AND SENS:FREQ DOWN commands, see [SENSe: ] FREQuency: on page 831.
Page 833 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor <Factor> This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth. Parameters: <Factor> 1 to 100 PCT *RST: Example: FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT Manual operation: "Center Frequency Stepsize"...
Page 834 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL This command restores the full span. Usage: Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Full Span" on page 389 "Zero Span" on page 389 [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <Frequency> This command defines a start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain. Parameters: <Frequency>...
Page 835 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] <State> This command turns signal tracking on and off. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Manual operation: "Signal Tracking State" on page 391 CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth <Bandwidth> This command defines the bandwidth around the center frequency that is included in the signal tracking process.
Page 836: Configuring Bandwidth And Sweep Settings
® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 11.7.2 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings The commands required to configure the bandwidth, sweep and filter settings in a remote environment are described here. The tasks for manual operation are described chapter 6.5, "Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration", on page 402.
Page 837 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: BAND:AUTO OFF Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span. Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "RBW" on page 303 "Default Coupling" on page 412 [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio <Ratio> This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth (Hz) and the span (Hz).
Page 838 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <FilterType> CFILter Channel filters NORMal Gaussian filters 5-pole filters The 5-pole filter is not available for FFT sweeps. RRC filters CISPr | PULSe CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option Return value for query is always PULS.
Page 839 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation: "VBW" on page 410 "RBW/VBW " on page 411 "Default Coupling" on page 412 [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <Ratio> This command defines the coupling ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution band- width (RBW/VBW).
Page 840 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Remote commands exclusive to configuring sweeps: ....................840 [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt .....................840 [SENSe:]SWEep:OPTimize ....................841 [SENSe:]SWEep:POINts ....................842 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME ..................842 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ....................843 [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE ..................843 [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED ..............843 [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt <SweepCount> This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces.
Page 841 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Table 11-3: Optimization parameters in FFT mode Optimization mode Description Dynamic Optimizes the dynamic range by using the narrowest possible partial span (depend- ing on the RBW). The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A/D converter.
Page 842 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Note that the number of sweep points is limited to 10001 when measuring spurious emissions. For EMI measurements, 200001 sweep points are available. Parameters: <SweepPoints> Range: 101 to 100001 *RST: 1001 Example: SWE:POIN 251 Usage: SCPI confirmed...
Page 843 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE <Type> This command selects the sweep type. Parameters: <Type> AUTO Automatic selection of the sweep type between sweep mode and FFT. FFT mode *RST: AUTO Example: SWE:TYPE FFT Manual operation: "Sweep Type" on page 414 [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED This command queries the sweep type if you have turned on automatic selection of the...
Page 844: Configuring The Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling)
® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: BAND:FFT NARR Select narrow partial span for FFT filter. 11.7.3 Configuring the Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling) The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis set- tings in a remote environment. ●...
Page 845 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Unit> DBM | V | A | W | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere *RST: Example: CALC:UNIT:POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm. Manual operation: "Unit"...
Page 846 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: POW:NCOR ON Manual operation: "Noise cancellation" on page 153 11.7.3.2 Configuring the Attenuation ......................846 INPut:ATTenuation ....................846 INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO ........................847 INPut:EATT ......................847 INPut:EATT:AUTO ......................847 INPut:EATT:STATe INPut:ATTenuation <Attenuation> This command defines the total attenuation for RF input. If an electronic attenuator is available and active, the command defines a mechanical attenuation (see on page 847).
Page 847 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters INPut:EATT <Attenuation> This command defines an electronic attenuation manually. Automatic mode must be switched off (INP:EATT:AUTO OFF, see on page 847). INPut: E ATT: A UTO If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually, the command also adjusts the reference level.
Page 848 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters INPut:GAIN:STATe <State> This command turns the preamplifier on and off. The command requires option R&S FSW-B24. For R&S FSW 26 or higher models, the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream- plifier is activated.
Page 849 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe] <Range> This command defines the display range of the y-axis. Note that the command works only for a logarithmic scaling. You can select the scaling with DISPlay[: W INDow<n>]: T RACe: Y : S PACing Parameters: <Range>...
Page 850: Configuring Triggered And Gated Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Position> 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border, 100% corre- sponds to the upper display border. *RST: 100 PCT = frequency display; 50 PCT = time dis- play Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50PCT Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation:...
Page 851 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 11.7.4.1 Configuring the Triggering Conditions ...................851 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DTIMe ................851 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] ................851 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff ..............852 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis ..............852 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal<port>] ................853 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower ................853 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IQPower ................853 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower .................. 854 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo ..................854 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe ..................854 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce ................
Page 852 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Note that this command can be used for any trigger source, not just IF Power (despite the legacy keyword). Note: If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger, the R&S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and I/Q data measurements.
Page 853 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: TRIG:LEV 2V Manual operation: "Trigger Level" on page 430 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower <TriggerLevel> This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed.
Page 854 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <Level> This command defines the level the video signal must exceed to cause a trigger event. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed. Parameters: <Level>...
Page 855 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Source> IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector. EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT/OUTPUT connector. Note: Connector must be configured for "Input". EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT/ OUTPUT connector. Note: Connector must be configured for "Input".
Page 856 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: TRIG:SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering. TRIG:TIME:RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s. Manual operation: "Repetition Interval" on page 430 11.7.4.2 Configuring Gated Measurements ....................856 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe ...................
Page 857 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters ● frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and I/Q mode measurements using an IF Power trigger. Parameters: <DelayTime> Range: 0 s to 30 s *RST: Example: SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100us Manual operation: "Gate Delay" on page 433 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <GateLength>...
Page 858 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation: "Trigger Source" on page 427 "External Trigger 1/2/3" on page 428 "Video" on page 428 "IF Power" on page 429 "RF Power" on page 429 "Power Sensor" on page 430 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE <Type>...
Page 859 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Direction> INPut Port works as an input. OUTPut Port works as an output. *RST: INPut Manual operation: "Trigger 2/3" on page 383 OUTPut:TRIGger<port>:LEVel <Level> This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output. This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut:...
Page 860: Adjusting Settings Automatically
® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <OutputType> DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R&S FSW has triggered inter- nally. TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event. UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal.
Page 861 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode, settings related to data acquisition (measurement time, hys- teresis) can only be adjusted automatically in the MSRA Master, not in the MSRA applications.......................861 [SENSe:]ADJust:ALL ................
Page 862 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:DURation:MODE <Mode> In order to determine the ideal reference level, the R&S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data. This command selects the way the R&S FSW determines the length of the measurement . Parameters: <Mode>...
Page 863 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Threshold> Range: 0 dB to 200 dB *RST: +1 dB Default unit: dB Example: SENS:ADJ:CONF:HYST:UPP 2 Example: For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm, the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm. Manual operation: "Upper Level Hysteresis"...
Page 864: Configuring The Data Input And Output
® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 11.7.6 Configuring the Data Input and Output ● Input........................ 864 ● Using External Mixers................... 867 ● Setting up Probes....................881 ● External Generator Control................... 883 ● Working with Power Sensors................893 ● Configuring the Outputs..................
Page 865 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <ConnType> RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband I connector *RST: Example: INP:CONN:AIQI Selects the analog baseband input. Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Input Connector" on page 320 INPut:COUPling <CouplingType> This command selects the coupling type of the RF input. Parameters: <CouplingType>...
Page 866 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters INPut:FILTer:YIG[:STATe] <State> This command turns the YIG-preselector on and off. Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in "YIG-Prese- lector" on page 320. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 *RST: 1 (0 for I/Q Analyzer, GSM, VSA and MC Group Delay measurements)
Page 867 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Source> Radio Frequency ("RF INPUT" connector) Digital IQ data (only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface R&S FSW-B17) For details on I/Q input see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual. Analog Baseband signal (only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R&S FSW-B71) For details on Analog Baseband input see the R&S FSW I/Q...
Page 868 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters ● Basic Settings....................... 868 ● Mixer Settings....................... 870 ● Conversion Loss Table Settings................874 ● Programming Example: Working with an External Mixer........878 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer....................868 [SENSe:]MIXer[:STATe] .....................
Page 869 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation: "Bias Settings" on page 371 [SENSe:]MIXer:LOPower <Level> This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer's LO port. Parameters: <Level> numeric value Range: 13.0 dBm to 17.0 dBm Increment: 0.1 dB *RST: 15.5 dBm Example:...
Page 870 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation: "Auto ID Threshold" on page 371 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set- tings................870 [SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:HANDover ................870 [SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STARt? ................871 [SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STOP? ................871 [SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet ................871...
Page 871 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]MIXer:FREQuency:STOP? This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops. Example: MIX:FREQ:STOP? Queries the stop frequency of the band. Usage: Query only Manual operation: "RF Start / RF Stop" on page 367 [SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave-...
Page 872 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Band Frequency start [GHz] Frequency stop [GHz] 110.0 170.0 140.0 220.0 220.0 325.0 325.0 500.0 USER 32.18 68.22 (default) (default) *) The band formerly referred to as "A" is now named "KA". [SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe <State>...
Page 873 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]MIXer:HARMonic[:LOW] <HarmOrder> This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low (first) range. Parameters: <HarmOrder> numeric value Range: 2 to 61 (USER band); for other bands: see band definition *RST: 2 (for band F) Example:...
Page 874 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW] <Average> This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low (first) range. Parameters: <Average> numeric value Range: 0 to 100 *RST: 24.0 dB Default unit: dB MIX:LOSS 20dB Example: Manual operation:...
Page 875 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND <Type> This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Page 876 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed. Usage: Query only [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table. Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see [SENSe:...
Page 877 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: CORR:CVL:SEL 'LOSS_TAB_4' Selects the conversion loss table. CORR:CVL:DATA 1MHZ,-30DB,2MHZ,-40DB Manual operation: "Position/Value" on page 376 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic <HarmOrder> This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used.
Page 878 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Before this command can be performed, the conversion loss table must be selected (see on page 878). [SENSe: ] CORRection: C VL: S ELect This command is only available with option B21 (External Mixer) installed. Parameters: <PortType>...
Page 879 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer, this measurement will not return useful results. //--------------Preparing the instrument ----------- //Reset the instrument *RST //Activate the use of the connected external mixer. SENS:MIX ON //----------- Configuring basic mixer behavior ------------- //Set the LO level of the mixer's LO port to 15 dBm.
Page 880 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Configuring a conversion loss table for a user-defined band //--------------Preparing the instrument ----------- //Reset the instrument *RST //Activate the use of the connected external mixer. SENS:MIX ON //--------------Configuring a new conversion loss table -------------- //Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example // (extended V band) SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL 'UserTable'...
Page 881 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 11.7.6.3 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors, if the Analog Baseband interface ( option R&S FSW-B71) is installed................881 [SENSe:]PROBe:ID:PARTnumber? ................881 [SENSe:]PROBe:ID:SRNumber? ................. 881 [SENSe:]PROBe:SETup:MODE ................
Page 882 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Suffix: 1 | 2 | 3 Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF (currently not supported; use "1" with RF Input Connec- tor setting "Baseband Input I") Parameters: <Mode>...
Page 883 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Usage: Query only [SENSe:]PROBe:SETup:TYPE? Queries the type of the probe. Suffix: 1 | 2 | 3 Selects the connector: 1 = Baseband Input I 2 = Baseband Input Q 3 = RF (currently not supported; use "1" with RF Input Connec- tor setting "Baseband Input I") Return values: <Type>...
Page 884 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SOURce:EXTernal:FREQuency <Frequency> This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external generator. Parameters: <Frequency> Source frequency of the external generator. *RST: 1100050000 Example: SOUR:EXT:FREQ 10MHz Manual operation: "(Manual) Source Frequency" on page 346 SOURce:EXTernal:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] <State>...
Page 885 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: SOUR:EXT:FREQ:NUM 4" "SOUR:EXT:FREQ:DEN 3" Sets a multiplication factor of 4/3, i.e. the transmit frequency of the generator is 4/3 times the analyzer frequency. Manual operation: "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/ Offset)" on page 346 SOURce:EXTernal:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator <Value>...
Page 886 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation: "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/ Offset)" on page 346 SOURce:EXTernal:POWer[:LEVel] <Level> This command sets the output power of the selected generator. Parameters: <Level> <numeric value> *RST: -20 dBm Example: SOUR:EXT:POW -30dBm Sets the generator level to -30 dBm Manual operation: "Source Power"...
Page 887 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters ............888 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator:LINK ............888 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator:TYPE .......... 888 SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator:ADDRess SOURce:EXTernal:ROSCillator[:SOURce] <Source> This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external generator. If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument.
Page 888 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator:LINK <Type> This command selects the link type of the external generator if the GPIB interface is used. The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed. While, during GPIB operation, each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator sepa- rately, a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go if the TTL interface is also used.
Page 889 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: SYST:COMM:TCP:RDEV:GEN:ADDR 130.094.122.195 Manual operation: "GPIB Address / TCP/IP Address" on page 344 Source Calibration The following commands are required to activate the calibration functions of the exter- nal tracking generator. However, they are only available if external generator control is active (see on page 886).
Page 890 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <MeasType> THRough "TRANsmission" mode: calibration with direct connection between external generator and device input "REFLection" mode: calibration with short circuit at the input OPEN only allowed in "REFLection" mode: calibration with open input Example: INIT:CONT OFF Selects single sweep operation...
Page 891 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: CORR:REC Usage: Event Manual operation: "Recall" on page 348 [SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] <State> This command turns correction of measurement results (normalization) on and off. The command is available after you have created a reference trace for the selected measurement type with on page 889.
Page 892 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters It assumes a signal generator of the type SMU04 is connected to the R&S FSW, including TTL synchronization, as described in "External Generator Connections" on page 332. //--------------Preparing the instrument ----------- //Reset the instrument *RST //Set the frequency span.
Page 893 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SOUR:EXT:FREQ:FACT:DEN 2 SOUR:EXT:FREQ:OFFS 100KHZ //--------------Performing the calibration measurement ----------- //Perform a transmission measurement with direct connection between the generator //and the analyzer and wait till the end SENS:CORR:METH TRAN SENS:CORR:COLL:ACQ THR; *WAI //--------------Retrieving the calibration trace results ----------- //Retrieve the measured frequencies (10 Hz - 600 kHz) TRAC:DATA:X? TRACE1...
Page 894 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Suffix: 1...4 Power sensor index Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 *RST: Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET:CONF:AUTO OFF Manual operation: "Select" on page 325 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:COUNt? This command queries the number of power sensors currently connected to the R&S FSW.
Page 895 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters <SerialNo> Serial number of the power sensor assigned to the specified index Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET2:DEF '','NRP-Z81','', '123456' Assigns the power sensor with the serial number '123456' to the configuration "Power Sensor 2". SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET2:DEF? Queries the sensor assigned to "Power Sensor 2".
Page 896 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: CAL:PMET2:ZERO:AUTO ONCE;*WAI Starts zeroing the power sensor 2 and delays the execution of further commands until zeroing is concluded. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Zeroing Power Sensor" on page 325 CALCulate<n>:PMETer:RELative[:MAGNitude] <RefValue> This command defines the reference value for relative measurements.
Page 897 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:PMET2:REL:STAT ON Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2. FETCh:PMETer? This command queries the results of power sensor measurements. Suffix: ...
Page 898 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters The power sensor uses the duty cycle in combination with the mean power to calculate the power of the pulse. Suffix: 1...4 Power sensor Parameters: <Percentage> Range: 0.001 to 99.999 *RST: 99.999 Default unit: % Example:...
Page 899 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: PMET2:FREQ:LINK CENT Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer Manual operation: "Frequency Coupling" on page 326 [SENSe:]PMETer:MTIMe <Duration> This command selects the duration of power sensor measurements. Suffix: ...
Page 900 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Suffix: 1...4 Power sensor index Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: PMET2:MTIM:AVER ON Activates manual averaging. Manual operation: "Meas Time/Average" on page 326 [SENSe:]PMETer:ROFFset[:STATe] <State> This command includes or excludes the reference level offset of the analyzer for power sensor measurements.
Page 901 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]PMETer:UPDate[:STATe] <State> This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off. If on, the results are update even if a single sweep is complete. Suffix: 1...4 Power sensor index Parameters: <State>...
Page 902 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Triggering with Power Sensors ................902 [SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:DTIMe ................902 [SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:HOLDoff ..............902 [SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:HYSTeresis ................903 [SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:LEVel ................903 [SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:SLOPe ................904 [SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger[:STATe] [SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger:DTIMe <Time> This command defines the time period that the input signal has to stay below the IF power trigger level before the measurement starts.
Page 903 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Suffix: 1...4 Power sensor index Parameters: <Hysteresis> Range: 3 dB to 50 dB Increment: 1 dB *RST: 0 dB Example: PMET2:TRIG:HYST 10 Sets the hysteresis of the trigger to 10 dB. Manual operation: "Hysteresis"...
Page 904 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]PMETer:TRIGger[:STATe] <State> This command turns the external power trigger on and off. This command requires the use of an R&S NRP-Z81 power sensor. Suffix: 1...4 Power sensor index Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: PMET2:TRIG ON...
Page 905 The measured IF value is available at the IF OUT output con- nector at a frequency of 2 GHz and with a bandwidth of 2 GHz. This parameter is only available for instrument models R&S FSW43/50/67. VIDeo The displayed video signal (i.e. the filtered and detected IF sig- nal, 200mV) is available at the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD output con- nector.
Page 906 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Return values: <SideBand> NORMal The sideband at the output is identical to the RF signal. INVerted The sideband at the output is the inverted RF signal sideband. Example: OUTP:IF IF2 Activates output at the IF OUTPUT (2 GHZ) connector. OUTP:IF:SBAN? Queries the sideband provided at the connector.
Page 907: Analyzing Measurements (Basics)
® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) 11.8 Analyzing Measurements (Basics) The commands for general analysis tasks are described here. ● Zooming into the Display..................907 ● Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data........909 ● Working with Markers....................928 ● Configuring Display and Limit Lines..............975 11.8.1 Zooming into the Display 11.8.1.1...
Page 908 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: DISP:ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode. Manual operation: "Single Zoom" on page 448 "Restore Original Display" on page 449 "Deactivating Zoom (Selection mode)" on page 449 11.8.1.2 Using the Multiple Zoom .............908...
Page 909: Configuring The Trace Display And Retrieving Trace Data
® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Suffix: <zoom> 1...4 Selects the zoom window. If you turn off one of the zoom windows, all subsequent zoom windows move up one position. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Manual operation: "Multiple Zoom" on page 448 "Restore Original Display"...
Page 910 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE <Mode> This command selects the trace mode. In case of max hold, min hold or average trace mode, you can set the number of single measurements with . Note that synchronization to the end of [SENSe:...
Page 911 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results Parameters: <State> The automatic reset is off. The automatic reset is on. *RST: Example: DISP:WIND:TRAC3:MODE:HCON ON...
Page 912 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) [SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<t>] <State> This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF Usage: SCPI confirmed [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE <Mode> This command selects the trace averaging mode. Parameters: <Mode>...
Page 913 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <Detector> APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak QPEak Quasipeak (CISPR filter only) SAMPle First value detected per trace point RMS value AVERage Average CAVerage CISPR Average (CISPR filter only) CRMS CISPR RMS (CISPR filter only) *RST: APEak (I/Q Analyzer: RMS)
Page 914 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Copy Trace" on page 468 11.8.2.2 Configuring Spectrograms In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" or "level versus time" spectrum traces, the R&S FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data. A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time.
Page 915 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: INIT:CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode. INIT;*WAI Starts the sweep and waits for the end of the sweep. CALC:SGR:CONT ON Repeats the single sweep measurement without deleting the results of the last measurement.
Page 916 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Manual operation: "Selecting a frame to display" on page 415 CALCulate:SGRam|SPECtrogram:HDEPth <History> This command defines the number of frames to be stored in the R&S FSW memory. Parameters: <History> The maximum number of frames depends on the number of sweep points.
Page 917 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Manual operation: "Timestamp" on page 474 CALCulate:SGRam|SPECtrogram:TSTamp[:STATe] <State> This command activates and deactivates the time stamp. If the time stamp is active, some commands do not address frames as numbers, but as (relative) time values: ●...
Page 918 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SGRam|SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer <Percentage> This command defines the starting point of the color map. Parameters: <Percentage> Statistical frequency percentage. Range: 0 to 66 *RST: Default unit: % Example: DISP:WIND:SGR:COL:LOW 10 Sets the start of the color map to 10%. Manual operation: "Start / Stop"...
Page 919 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <ColorScheme> Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low lev- els, red colors indicate high ones. COLD Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low lev- els, blue colors indicate high ones.
Page 920 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Example: CALC:MATH:STAT ON Turns trace mathematics on. CALC:MATH:EXPR:DEF (TRACE1-TRACE3) Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1. Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Trace Math Function" on page 469 CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE <Mode> This command selects the way the R&S FSW calculates trace mathematics. Parameters: <Mode>...
Page 921 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:MATH:STAT ON Turns on trace mathematics. Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Trace Math Function" on page 469 "Trace Math Off" on page 470 11.8.2.4 Retrieving Trace Results This chapter describes how to retrieve data from standard traces.
Page 922 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <Format> ASCii ASCii format, separated by commas. This format is almost always suitable, regardless of the actual data format. However, the data is not as compact as other for- mats may be. REAL,32 32-bit IEEE 754 floating-point numbers in the "definite length block format".
Page 923 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Query parameters: <ResultType> Selects the type of result to be returned. TRACE1 | ... | TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace. For details see table 11-6. LIST Returns the results of the peak list evaluation for Spurious Emis- sion and Spectrum Emission Mask measurements.
Page 924 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Table 11-7: Return values for LIST parameter For each peak, the command returns 11 values in the following order: <No>,<StartFreq>,<StopFreq>,<RBW>,<PeakFreq>,<PowerAbs>,<PowerRel>,<PowerDelta>,<Limit- Check>,<Unused1>,<Unused2> ● <No>: range number ● <StartFreq>,<StopFreq>: start and stop frequency of the range ●...
Page 925 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Query parameters: <TraceNumber> Trace number. TRACE1 | ... | TRACE6 Example: TRAC3:X? TRACE1 Returns the x-values for trace 1 in window 3. Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Spectrum Emission Mask" on page 113 11.8.2.5 Formats for Returned Values: ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC:DATA or TRAC:IQ:DATA command, the...
Page 926 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) //Resets the instrument LAY:ADD? '1',BEL,SGR //Displays a new window below window 1 and activates spectrogram display. //The new window name is returned as a result: '2'. //The spectrogram is updated with each new sweep. INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode.
Page 927 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) //currently positioned at in all frames. CALC:MARK2:SGR:XY:MAX //Sets marker 2 to the maximum level in the entire spectrogram. CALC:DELT1:SGR:FRAM 3s //Sets the deltamarker 1 to the frame captured 3 seconds after marker 1. By default //it is set to the peak of that frame and displays the level difference to marker 1.
Page 928: Working With Markers
® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) TRAC:DATA? TRACE1 //Retrieves the trace data for the selected frame only. 11.8.3 Working with Markers The commands required to work with markers and marker functions in a remote envi- ronment are described here. The tasks for manual operation are described in chap- ter 7.4, "Marker Usage",...
Page 929 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker:AOFF This command turns all delta markers off. Example: CALC:DELT:AOFF Turns all delta markers off. Usage: Event CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK <State> This command links delta marker <m> to marker 1. If you change the horizontal position (x-value) of marker 1, delta marker <m> changes its horizontal position to the same value.
Page 930 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <Mode> ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms. RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker. *RST: RELative Example: CALC:DELT:MODE ABS Absolute delta marker position. CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF <Reference> This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1. The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference.
Page 931 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <Trace> Trace number the marker is assigned to. Example: CALC:DELT2:TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2. CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X <Position> This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x-axis. If necessary, the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power.
Page 932 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Example: CALC:MARK4:LINK:TO:MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2. Manual operation: "Linking to Another Marker" on page 300 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State> This command turns markers on and off. If the corresponding marker number is cur- rently active as a deltamarker, it is turned into a normal marker.
Page 933 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Manual operation: "Marker 1/2/3/4" on page 282 "Marker 1/2/3" on page 287 "Marker Position (X-value)" on page 299 "Marker Table" on page 441 "Marker Peak List" on page 441 11.8.3.2 General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionality.
Page 934 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) 11.8.3.3 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search The following commands control the marker search..................934 CALCulate:MARKer:LOEXclude ................934 CALCulate<n>:MARKer:PEXCursion ................935 CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ................935 CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits:LEFT ................935 CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits:RIGHT ..............936 CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits:ZOOM[:STATe] ....................936 CALCulate:THReshold ..................936 CALCulate:THReshold:STATe CALCulate:MARKer:LOEXclude <State>...
Page 935 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State> This command turns marker search limits on and off. If you perform a measurement in the time domain, this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example:...
Page 936 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Example: CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on. CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz. Manual operation: "Search Limits (Left / Right)" on page 192 "Left Limit / Right Limit" on page 268 CALCulate:MARKer:X:SLIMits:ZOOM[:STATe] <State>...
Page 937 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) 11.8.3.4 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace. ● Positioning Normal Markers ................. 937 ● Positioning Delta Markers..................939 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace..............937 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO ..............937...
Page 938 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) In the spectrogram, the vertical marker position remains the same. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Search Mode for Next Peak" on page 499 "Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction" on page 502 "Search Next Peak"...
Page 939 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi- tion. In the spectrogram, the vertical marker position remains the same. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Search Mode for Next Peak" on page 499 "Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction"...
Page 940 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) ............940 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT ............940 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT ............940 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] ............940 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt ............941 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT ............941 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT ............941 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] ............941 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value. The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi- tion.
Page 941 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Usage: Event Manual operation: "Search Mode for Next Peak" on page 499 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value. The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi- tion.
Page 942 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) 11.8.3.5 Retrieving Marker Results The following commands are used to retrieve the results of markers. You can use the marker values to position the center frequency or reference level directly using the following commands: ●...
Page 943 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Marker 1/2/3/4" on page 282 "Marker 1/2/3" on page 287 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y? This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y-axis. If necessary, the command activates the delta marker first. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 944 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode. CALC:MARK2 ON Switches marker 2. INIT;*WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end. CALC:MARK2:Y? Outputs the measured value of marker 2. Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Marker Table"...
Page 945 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) ......947 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam|SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe ......947 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam|SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow .......947 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam|SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT ......947 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam|SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum[:PEAK] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam|SPECtrogram:FRAMe <Frame> | <Time> This command positions a marker on a particular frame. Parameters: <Frame> Selects a frame directly by the frame number. Valid if the time stamp is off.
Page 946 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Manual operation: "Marker Search Type" on page 503 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam|SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency. The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Page 947 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam|SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur- rent frequency. The search includes only frames above the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker. Usage: Event Manual operation:...
Page 948 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the delta markers. ● on page 940 CALCulate<n>: D ELTamarker<m>: M AXimum: L EFT ● on page 940 CALCulate<n>:...
Page 949 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam|SPECtrogram:SARea <SearchArea> This command defines the delta marker search area. Parameters: <SearchArea> VISible Performs a search within the visible frames. Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason (e.g. if the display update is off). MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory.
Page 950 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Usage: Event Manual operation: "Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction" on page 502 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam|SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency. The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker.
Page 951 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam|SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur- rent frequency. The search includes all frames. It does not change the horizontal position of the marker. Usage: Event Manual operation:...
Page 952 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <RefPoint> Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the refer- ence. For frequency domain measurements, it is a frequency in Hz. For time domain measurements, it is a point in time in s. *RST: Fixed Reference: OFF Example:...
Page 953 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to +30 dBm. Manual operation: "Defining a Fixed Reference"...
Page 954 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) The actual number of peaks that have been found may differ from the number of peaks you have set to be found because of the peak excursion. Return values: <NumberOfPeaks> CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN? Example: Queries the number of peaks. Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks[:IMMediate] <Peaks>...
Page 955 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <SortMode> Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x-axis. Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y-axis. *RST: Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values Manual operation: "Sort Mode"...
Page 956 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) 11.8.3.9 Noise Measurement Marker The following commands control the noise measurement marker function............956 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? .............956 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? This command queries the result of the noise measurement. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 957 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Useful commands for phase noise markers described elsewhere ● CALCulate<n>: D ELTamarker<m>: F UNCtion: F IXed: R POint: M AXimum[: PEAK] ● CALCulate<n>: D ELTamarker<m>: F UNCtion: F IXed: R POint: X ●...
Page 958 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON Example: Switches on the phase-noise measurement with all delta mark- ers.
Page 959 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Return values: <Power> Signal power over the marker bandwidth. Example: Activate the band power marker: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON Select the density mode for the result: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS Query the result: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:RES? Response: 20dBm/Hz Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN ...
Page 960 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE <Mode> This command selects the way the results for a band power delta marker are dis- played. Parameters: <Mode> POWer Result is displayed as a power in dBm. DENSity Result is displayed as a density in dBm/Hz. *RST: POWer CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?
Page 961 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) ..........962 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? ..........962 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ..........963 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME? CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <Distance> This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker. Parameters: <Distance> Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in For a positive offset, the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active reference point.
Page 962 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor? This command queries the Q factor of n dB down measurements. Return values: <QFactor> Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 963 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME? This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x-axis when measuring in the time domain. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 964 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK ON Switches on marker 1. CALC:MARK:COUN ON Switches on the frequency counter for marker 1. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ? Outputs the measured value.
Page 965 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) 11.8.3.14 Marker Demodulation The following commands control the demodulation of AM and FM signals at the marker position........965 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous ..........965 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff ..........965 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect .......... 966 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] ..................966 [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel ................. 966 [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous <State>...
Page 966 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM Manual operation: "Modulation" on page 517 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] <State> This command turns the audio demodulator on and off when the measurement rea- ches a marker position. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:MARK3:FUNC:DEM ON...
Page 967 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) 11.8.3.15 Programming Examples for Using Markers and Marker Functions Various programming examples on how to use markers and the special marker func- tions are provided here. The use of spectrogram markers is demonstrated in chapter 11.8.2.6, "Programming Example: Configuring a Spectrogram",...
Page 968 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) //Activates marker 2 and sets it to the peak of trace 2. CALC:MARK3:X 150MHz //Activates marker 3 and sets it to the freq. 150 MHz on trace 1. CALC:MARK4:TRAC 4 //Activates marker 4 and sets it to the peak of trace 4. CALC:MARK1:MAX:AUTO ON //Moves M1 to the current peak of trace 1 after each sweep.
Page 969 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) //its position CALC2:SPEC:FRAM:SEL 0 CALC2:MARK1 ON CALC2:MARK1:X? CALC2:MARK1:Y? //Set marker2 on the peak power in frame at -324ms and query its position CALC2:MARK2 ON CALC2:MARK2:SGR:FRAM -324ms CALC2:MARK2:X? CALC2:MARK2:Y? //Set marker3 on peak power level in the entire spectrogram in memory and //query its position CALC2:MARK3 ON CALC2:MARK:SPEC:SAR MEM...
Page 970 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) INIT;*WAI //Performs a measurement and waits for it to end Example: Using a Fixed Reference Marker This example demonstrates how to configure and use reference markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in "Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Exam- ples"...
Page 971 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:ANN:LAB ON //--------------- Retrieving results ------------- CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN? CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:X? CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y? //------------ Exporting the peak list ------------ MMEM:STOR:PEAK 'PeakList' Example: Measuring Noise Density This example demonstrates how to measure noise density using noise markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment.
Page 972 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALC:DELT3:X 1MHz CALC:DELT4 ON CALC:DELT4:X 1.5MHz //Activates the phase noise measurement function for offsets 100kHz/500kHz/1MHz/1.5MHz. BAND:VID? //Queries the used VBW (= 0.1*RBW) //-------- Querying the phase noise results ------------------------------ CALC:DELT1:FUNC:PNO:RES? CALC:DELT2:FUNC:PNO:RES? CALC:DELT3:FUNC:PNO:RES? CALC:DELT4:FUNC:PNO:RES? //Queries the difference in level between the peak and the noise power density //measured at the deltamarkers, referred to the carrier power level (dBc) Example: Measuring the Power in a Channel Using Band Power Markers...
Page 973 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALC:DELT3:FUNC:BPOW:SPAN 30MHz //Sets the bandwidth to be measured to 30 MHz CALC:DELT3:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS //Sets the result to be a density (power per Hz bandwidth) //---------------Retrieving Results------------- CALC:MARK1:FUNC:BPOW:RES? //Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around marker 1. CALC:DELT2:FUNC:BPOW:RES? //Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around deltamarker 2.
Page 974 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Audio output is provided for 5s each time the signal reaches its initial maximum, how- ever only if it is higher than -90 dBm (10% of the total y-axis range) in order to ignore noise.
Page 975: Configuring Display And Limit Lines
® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Example: Performing a Highly Accurate Frequency Measurement Using the Sig- nal Count Marker This example demonstrates how to determine highly accurate frequency values using signal count markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment. It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in chapter 11.15.1, "Programming Example: Performing a Basic Frequency...
Page 976 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <Position> The value range is variable. You can use any unit you want, the R&S FSW then converts the unit to the currently selected unit. If you omit a unit, the R&S FSW uses the currently selected unit. *RST: (state is OFF) Example:...
Page 977 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line> <Time> This command defines the position of a time line. Parameters: <Time> Note that you can not set a time line to a position that is higher than the current sweep time. Range: 0 s to 1600 s *RST:...
Page 978 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) ................981 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SPACing ................. 981 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:LOWer:STATe ................981 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:LOWer:THReshold ..................... 982 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:NAME ....................982 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UNIT ................. 982 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UPPer[:DATA] ................983 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MARGin .................. 983 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MODE .................983 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UPPer:OFFSet ..................983 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SHIFt ................984 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SPACing ..................984 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UPPer:STATe ................984 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UPPer:THReshold CALCulate:LIMit:COMMent <Comment> This command defines a comment for a limit line.
Page 979 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:MODE <Mode> This command selects the horizontal limit line scaling. Parameters: <Mode> ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values (Hz or s). RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre- quency (frequency domain) or the left diagram border (time domain).
Page 980 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) CALCulate:LIMit<k>:LOWer[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints> This command defines the vertical definition points of a lower limit line. Parameters: <LimitLinePoints> Variable number of level values. Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate:...
Page 981 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <Offset> Numeric value. *RST: Default unit: dB Manual operation: "Y-Offset" on page 531 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SHIFt <Distance> This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically. Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define.
Page 982 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) The R&S FSW uses the threshold for the limit check, if the limit line violates the thresh- old. Parameters: <Threshold> Numeric value. The unit depends on CALCulate: L IMit<k>: U NIT on page 982. *RST: -200 dBm Manual operation:...
Page 983 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Manual operation: "Data points" on page 533 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UPPer:MARGin <Margin> This command defines an area around an upper limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated. Parameters: <Margin> numeric value *RST: Default unit: dB Manual operation: "Margin"...
Page 984 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Parameters: <Distance> Defines the distance that the limit line moves. The unit depends on CALCulate: L IMit<k>: U NIT on page 982. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Shift y" on page 534 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:UPPer:SPACing <InterpolType> This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of an upper limit line from one horizontal point to the next.
Page 985 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Managing Limit Lines Useful commands for managing limit lines described in the R&S FSW User Manual: ● MMEM:SEL[:ITEM]:LIN:ALL ● MMEM:STOR:TYPE ● MMEM:LOAD:TYPE Remote commands exclusive to managing limit lines: ....................985 CALCulate:LIMit:ACTive? ..................... 985 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:COPY ....................985 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:DELete...
Page 986 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Manual operation: "Delete Line" on page 531 CALCulate:LIMit<k>:STATe <State> This command turns the limit check for a specific limit line on and off. To query the limit check result, use CALCulate: L IMit<k>: F AIL? Note that a new command exists to activate the limit check and define the trace to be checked in one step (see on page 986).
Page 987 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Example: CALC:LIM:CLE Deletes the result of the limit check. Usage: SCPI confirmed CALCulate:LIMit<k>:FAIL? This command queries the result of a limit check. Note that for SEM measurements, the limit line suffix <k> is irrelevant, as only one spe- cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class.
Page 988 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) //Defines 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 1. CALC:LIM1:UPP:MODE ABS //Selects an absolute vertical scale for limit line 1. CALC:LIM1:UNIT DBM //Selects the unit dBm for limit line 1. CALC:LIM1:UPP -10,-5,0,-5,-10 //Defines 5 definition points for limit line 1. CALC:LIM1:UPP:MARG 5dB //Defines an area of 5 dB around limit line 1 where limit check violations //are still tolerated.
Page 989 ® Remote Commands R&S Analyzing Measurements (Basics) Example: Performing a Limit Check This example demonstrates how to perform a limit check during a basic frequency sweep measurement in a remote environment. The limit lines configured in "Example: Configuring Limit Lines" on page 987 are assumed to exist and be active.
Page 990: Managing Settings And Results
® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results //Clears the previous limit check results //------------- Performing the measurement--------------------- INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the last sweep has finished. //-------------- Retrieving limit check results---------------------------- CALC:LIM1:FAIL? //Queries the result of the upper limit line check CALC:LIM3:FAIL? //Queries the result of the lower limit line check 11.9 Managing Settings and Results...
Page 991: General Data Storage And Loading Commands
® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results ● General Data Storage and Loading Commands........... 991 ● Selecting the Items to Store.................. 997 ● Storing and Loading Instrument Settings............1000 ● Storing or Printing Screenshots................1005 ● Storing Measurement Results................1011 ●...
Page 992 ® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results MMEMory:CATalog? This command returns the contents of a particular directory. Query parameters: <Path> String containing the path and directory. If you leave out the path, the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory:...
Page 993 ® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory> This command changes the current directory. Parameters: <Directory> String containing the path to another directory. The path may be relative or absolute. Usage: SCPI confirmed MMEMory:COMMent <Comment> This command defines a comment for the stored settings. Parameters: <Comment>...
Page 994 ® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results <Block> Data block with the following structure. Hash sign. <number> Length of the length information. <number> Length information of the binary data (number of bytes). <data> Binary data with the indicated <number> of bytes. Example: MMEM:NAME '\Public\User\Testfile.txt' Creates a new file called 'testfile.txt'.
Page 995 ® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results <NewFileName> String containing the path and name of the target file. MMEM:MOVE 'C:\TEST01.CFG','SETUP.CFG' Example: Renames TEST01.CFG in SETUP.CFG in directory C:\. Usage: Event SCPI confirmed MMEMory:MSIS <Device> This command selects the default storage device used by all MMEMory commands. Parameters: <Device>...
Page 996 ® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results Parameters: <Drive> String containing the drive name or path of the directory you want to map. <HostName> String containing the host name of the computer or the IP address and the share name of the drive. '<\host name or IP address\share name>' <UserName>...
Page 997: Selecting The Items To Store
® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results Parameters: <Directory> String containing the path of the directory to delete. Note that the directory you want to remove may contain no con- tents. Usage: Event 11.9.2 Selecting the Items to Store The following commands select the items to be included in the configuration file.
Page 998 ® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:DEFault MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault This command selects the current settings as the only item to store to and load from a configuration file. Manual operation: "Items" on page 548 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:HWSettings <State> MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings <State> This command includes or excludes hardware settings when storing or loading a con- figuration file.
Page 999 ® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:NONE MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE This command does not include any of the following items when storing or loading a configuration file. ● Hardware configuration: MMEMory: S ELect[: I TEM]: H WSettings ● Limit lines: MMEMory:...
Page 1000: Storing And Loading Instrument Settings
® Remote Commands R&S Managing Settings and Results Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: MMEM:SEL:TRAN:ALL ON Manual operation: "Items" on page 548 "Save" on page 576 11.9.3 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings See also: ● on page 686 to select the channel. INSTrument[:...

This manual is also suitable for:

Fsw8 Fsw67 Fsw26 Fsw13 Fsw50

Rohde & Schwarz FSW43 User Manual

Table of Contents

Frequency Sweep

Chapter 6 .1, "Configuration Overview" ,On Page 312

5.3 Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (Aclr) Measurement

Sweep List

Table of Contents

5.8 Statistical Measurements (Apd, Ccdf)

5.13.3 Emi Measurement Basics

5.13.4 Emi Measurement Configuration

Chapter 7.5.3.2, "Limit Line Settings and Functions", on Page 528 EMI Marker Configuration

Chapter 9 .3.2, "Transducer Settings" ,On Page 571

Center Frequency/Span

Quick Links

Chapters

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for Rohde & Schwarz FSW43

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz FSW43